Electrical Sector Solutions
Volume 11:
Vehicle and
Commercial
Controls
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Control
Tab 1—Electronic Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-1
Tab 2—Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-1
Tab 3—Special Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-1
Tab 4—Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-1
Tab 5—Dimmers and Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-1
Tab 6—Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-1
Tab 7—Definitions and Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T7-1
11
Copyright
Dimensions, Weights and Ratings
Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not
be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available
upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without
notice. Photographs are representative of production units.
Terms and Conditions
All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes
occur, they are published in Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders
accepted by Eaton’s Electrical Sector are subject to the general terms and conditions
as set forth in Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions.
Technical and Descriptive Publications
This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further
information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated
brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton
Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com.
Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21
Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in
facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission
for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of
these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
WARNING
The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions
of the U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that
are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these
codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.
Copyright ©2014 Eaton, All Rights Reserved.
These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products
Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior
or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire
obligation of Eaton’s Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com i
Introduction
Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality,
control and automation, and monitoring products.
At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every
successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly
skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.
In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built
on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer
service and support, we know what’s important to you.
Solutions
Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic
approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on
the following three areas in all we do:
●Reliability—maintain the
appropriate level of power
continuity without
disruption or unexpected
downtime
●Efficiency—minimize
energy usage, operating
costs, equipment footprint
and environmental impact
●Safety—identify and
mitigate electrical hazards
to protect what you value
most
Using the Eaton Catalog Library
As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive
catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our
products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work
in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E,
for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include:
●Volume 1—Residential
and Light Commercial
(CA08100002E)
●Volume 2—Commercial
Distribution (CA08100003E)
●Volume 3—Power
Distribution and Control
Assemblies (CA08100004E)
●Volume 4—Circuit
Protection (CA08100005E)
●Volume 5—Motor Control
and Protection
(CA08100006E)
●Volume 6—Solid-State
Motor Control
(CA08100007E)
●Volume 7—Logic Control,
Operator Interface and
Connectivity Solutions
(CA08100008E)
●Volume 8—Sensing
Solutions (CA08100010E)
●Volume 9—Original
Equipment Manufacturer
(CA08100011E)
●Volume 10—Enclosed
Control (CA08100012E)
●Volume 11—Vehicle and
Commercial Controls
(CA08100013E)
●Volume 12—Aftermarket,
Renewal Parts and Life
Extension Solutions
(CA08100014E)
●Volume 13—Counters,
Timers and Tachometers
(CA08100015E)—Available
in electronic format only
●Volume 14—Fuses
(CA08100016E)—Available
in electronic format only
●Volume 15—Solar Inverters
and Electrical Balance of
System (CA08100018E)
These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview
of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information,
consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library.
These references include:
●The Consulting Application
Guide (CA08104001E)
●The Eaton Power Quality
Product Guide (COR01FYA)
If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for,
not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the
Literature Library.
By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent
version of each volume and tab.
ii Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com
Introduction
Contact Us
If you need additional help, you can find contact information
under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical.
Product Selection Guide
TAB 1—Electronic Products
TAB 2—Rockers
TAB 3—Special Devices
Description Page
E31 eSM V11-T1-2
E30 eSM V11-T1-7
E32 eSM V11-T1-10
E33 eSM V11-T1-14
eVu V11-T1-17
Description Page
Introduction V11-T2-2
NGR V11-T2-8
SVR V11-T2-32
Dual Motion Safety Switch V11-T2-41
1500/2500 V11-T2-43
1600/2600 V11-T2-47
Rockette V11-T2-54
8006/8007—EURO SR V11-T2-62
8004/8005 Euro Full-Size V11-T2-65
X Series V11-T2-68
8064/8065 ESPORT V11-T2-72
Accessories V11-T2-76
Technical Data V11-T2-78
Symbol Library V11-T2-80
Description Page
High Capacity Switches V11-T3-2
Panelboard Switches V11-T3-3
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy
Duty—AC/DC Rated
V11-T3-5
Locking Rocker V11-T3-9
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com iii
Introduction
TAB 4—Toggle Switches
TAB 5—Dimmers and Wipers
TAB 6—Pushbuttons
TAB 7—Definitions and Index
Description Page
Introduction V11-T4-2
Military Purpose Toggles V11-T4-3
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles V11-T4-9
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated V11-T4-11
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated V11-T4-20
X Series Toggles V11-T4-24
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches V11-T4-27
Accessories V11-T4-31
Technical Data V11-T4-35
Description Page
Paddle and Slide Controls V11-T5-2
Rotary Wipers V11-T5-4
Description Page
AC Rated V11-T6-2
Illuminated AC/DC Rated V11-T6-8
XP Series Sealed Pushbutton V11-T6-21
Description Page
Definitions V11-T7-1
Index V11-T7-2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T1-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Electronic Products
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rockers
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rockers
E31 eSM—Multiplexed Keypad
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplex Rocker
Switch Units
1.1 E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-2
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-2
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-2
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-4
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-5
1.2 E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-7
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-7
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-7
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-8
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9
1.3 E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-10
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-10
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-10
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-11
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-11
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-12
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-13
1.4 E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-14
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-14
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-14
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-15
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-15
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-15
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-16
1.5 eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-17
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-17
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-17
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-17
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-17
V11-T1-2 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Contents
Description Page
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-4
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-5
Product Description
Because your vehicle is
continuously exposed to
nature’s elements, we offer
the latest in Eaton’s
multiplexed line of switch
product, the E31 Keypad
eSM. Eaton’s E31 Keypad
eSM multiplex switch module
offers a flexible and sealed
solution for high-density
switch requirements in
severe environments. The
keypad can be configured
with any graphic/switch,
as well as with customer-
defined illumination. For
customers requiring
additional switches,
expansion modules can
be used with no requirement
for additional CAN nodes. For
additional product flexibility
and differentiated operator
control, the E31 Keypad eSM
is designed to communicate
with Eaton’s E32 and E33
sealed rocker expansion
modules.
Application Description
Great for specialty vehicle,
construction, and agricultural
equipment markets. The eSM
product is especially suitable
for severe environmental
applications and where there
is a desire to move to a
multiplexed solution to
simplify wiring and control
requirements. Typical
applications are:
Target Market Segments:
●Tractors
●Wheel loaders
●Refuse vehicles
●Concrete mixers
●Street sweepers
●Mining equipment
●Emergency vehicles
●Transit buses
Features and Benefits
Key Features
●Fully compliant with
J1939/CAN 2.0b
messaging
●IP68 degree of protection
from front and rear of
module
●Rocker and keypad
expansion module
capability
●Exceptional illumination
characteristics
●LED backlighting of
icons
●Four color daylight-
visible indicators per
switch
●Message-controlled
dimming and flash rates
●Large switch surface area
and alignment ridges for
ease of gloved hand use
●Exceptional tactile and
audible feedback of switch
actuation
●Electrical/mechanical life to
over 1,000,000 cycles
●9–32 Vdc operating voltage
●Immunity per SAE
J1455/1113
●Power disturbance
●Radiated immunity
●Radiated emissions
Advantages
●Reduced assembly labor
due to ease of installation,
allowing for mounting and
connection of eight
switches at one time as
opposed to individually
●Reduced wire harness
complexity; uses one
harness to a controller,
reducing wiring,
connection point, and
controller requirements
●Reduced harness size
offers an overall reduction
in weight, improving
operational efficiency of
the equipment
●Increase in life-cycle
over traditional
electromechanical
switches
●Front, rear, and panel
sealing for harsh
environments
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T1-3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module, 2x4
How To Order—E31 eSM—Keypad Master Module, 4x3
How To Order—E31 eSM—Keypad Master Module, 3x5
Notes
1Contact Eaton sales for custom graphics. See V11-T2-80–V11-T2-84 and V11-T2-95–V11-T2-102, symbols library, for available graphics.
2For use of multiple masters on one system. (Address 3–8 available as special order.)
Columns
4=4 columns
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
E31 2 4 M 4 W 1 CV 1
Series
E31 =Keypad
Rows
2=2 rows
Communication
M=Master (J1939 CAN 2.0b)
E= Expansion (LIN)
Backlighting
W=White
G= Green
A=Amber
Address 2
1=Address 1
2= Address 2
FF = Expansion
Example:
Indicators
4=Red, amber, green, blue
G=Green
O= Orange
Indicators
1=Indicators
2= No indicators
Icons 1
CV =Circle
XX =No icon
Columns
3=3 columns
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
E31 43M4WCV 1
Series
E31 =Keypad
Rows
4=4 rows
Communication
M=Master (J1939 CAN 2.0b)
Backlighting
W=White
Address 2
1=Address 1
Example:
Indicators
4=Red, amber, green, blue
Icons 1
CV =Circle
XX =No icon
Columns
5=5 columns
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
E31 35M4WCV 1
Series
E31 =Keypad
Rows
3=3 rows
Communication
M=Master (J1939 CAN 2.0b)
Backlighting
W=White
Address 2
1=Address 1
Example:
Indicators
4=Red, amber, green, blue
Icons 1
CV =Circle
XX =No icon
V11-T1-4 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Product Selection
Master
E31 Keypad eSM Master Module, 2x4
E31 Keypad eSM Master Module, 4x3
E31 Keypad eSM Master Module, 3x5
Expansion
E31 Keypad eSM Expansion Module, 2x4 1
Note
1Expansion keypad module is available in 2x4 configuration only.
Basic Part Indicator Colors Backlighting Icon Graphic Address Catalog Number
E3124M Red, amber, green, blue White Circle 1 E3124M4W1CV1
2E3124M4W1CV2
None 1 E3124M4W1XX1
2E3124M4W1XX2
Green Green Circle 1 E3124MGG1CV1
2E3124MGG1CV2
None 1 E3124MGG1XX1
2E3124MGG1XX2
Orange Amber Circle 1 E3124MOA1CV1
2E3124MOA1CV2
None 1 E3124MOA1XX1
2E3124MOA1XX2
Basic Part Indicator Colors Backlighting Icon Graphic Address Catalog Number
E3143M Red, amber, green, blue White Circle 1 E3143M4W1CV1
2E3143M4W1CV2
None 1 E3143M4W1XX1
2E3143M4W1XX2
Basic Part Indicator Colors Backlighting Icon Graphic Address Catalog Number
E3135M Red, amber, green, blue White Circle 1 E3135M4W1CV1
2E3135M4W1CV2
None 1 E3135M4W1XX1
2E3135M4W1XX2
E3124M4W1CV1
E3143M—Custom
E3135M—Custom
Basic Part Indicator Colors Backlighting Icon Graphic Address Catalog Number
E3124E Red, amber, green, blue White Circle FF E3124E4W1CVFF
None FF E3124E4W1XXFF
Green Green Circle FF E3124EGG1CVFF
None FF E3124EGG1XXFF
Orange Amber Circle FF E3124EOA1CVFF
None FF E3124EOA1XXFF
E3124EGG1XXFF
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T1-5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Technical Data and Specifications
Master Module Wiring
Harness
The interconnection between
the master module and the
controller uses a minimum
four-wire harness with an
additional two pins associated
to expansion module
interconnection. Wire sizes
of 16–20 AWG can be
accommodated with the
Deutsch connector shown
in the mating connector
information.
Wiring Harness
Environmental and
Electronic Specifications
●Operational temperature:
–40° to +85°C
●Storage temperature:
–40° to +95°C
●Operational voltage:
9–32 Vdc
●Degree of protection: IP68
●Mechanical shock: 30g for
11 m s e c
●Handling drop: 1m
●Electrical/mechanical life:
1M cycles
●Load dump
●SAE J1455: 100V/12V
systems
●SA E J 1113 / 11 : 174 V fo r
24V systems
Mating Connector
Information
Deutsch DT Series connector
6-pin connector: DT06-6S
●EP11 (Black–Master)
●E008 (Gray–Expansion)
6-pin wedge lock: W6S
Female terminal:
0462-201-16141
(16-18-20 AWG)
Hole plug: 0413-217-1605
Crimper: HDT-48-00
E32 and E33 Rocker
Expansion Modules
The Keypad eSM master
module is capable of
supporting Eaton’s E32 and
E33 product line of rocker
eSMs. The E32 and E33
product line is an above-
panel–style rocker switch
module that contains any
combination of rocker or
indicator functionality with
no additional CAN node
requirement to the system.
Similar to the keypad, the
rocker module offers icon
graphic illumination with up to
four center indicator bar LEDs
for status or mode. This
product is also fully functional
to support dimming and
flashing capabilities through
software command.
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
2x4 Mounting Dimensions E31 Keypad Master or Expansion Module
PIN Master Expansion
1 Vbat Vbat
2 Common Common
3 CAN (+) LIN
4 CAN (–) LIN
5 Common Common
6 LIN Vbat
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
T
O
R
Q
U
E
3
0
I
N
-
L
B
(
3
.
4
N
-
m
)
4
6
XXXX
XXXXXXXX
MADE IN MEXICO
1
5
6
3
2
1
34.70
[1.37]
69.40 [2.73]
Ø 50.8
[2.00]
Ø 5.54
[0.218]
2X
66.2
[2.61]
97.2 [3.83]
15.5 [0.61]
16.0
[0.63]
M5 x 0.8 Nut and
Lock Washer 2X (Included)
Backlit Daylight
White Graphics
Area—8X
Lighted
Indicators
Optional
as Required
32.2
[1.27] Max.
17.7 [0.70]
15.2
[0.60]
17.1
[0.67]
18.5
[0.73]
15.5
[0.61]
Maximum Torque:
30 in-lbs (3.4 Nm)
V11-T1-6 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
4x3 Mounting Dimensions E31 Keypad Master Module
3x5 Mounting Dimensions E31 Keypad Master Module
95.25
[3.75]
Recommended Panel Opening
30.83
[1.21]
Ø31.75
[1.25]
Ø5.54
[0.218]
4X
38.10
[1.50]
50.80
[2.00]
Lighted
Indicators
Optional
as Required
15.5 [0.61]
127.5
[5.02]
16.0
[0.63]
Backlit Daylight
White Graphics
Area—12X
74.0 [2.91]
M5 x 0.8 Nut and
Lock Washer 4X (Included)
17.7 [0.70]
Maximum Torque:
30 in-lbs (3.4 Nm)
15.2
[0.60]
17.1
[0.67]
18.5
[0.73]
15.5
[0.61]
32.2
[1.27]
Max.
Depth with
Mating
Connector
63.50
[2.50]
88.90 [3.50]
Recommended Panel Opening
56.23
[2.21]
20.50
[0.81] Ø32.50
[1.280]
Ø5.54
[0.218]
97.0
[3.82]
121.1 [4.77]
15.5 [0.61]
16.0
[0.63]
M5 x 0.8 Nut and
Lock Washer 4X (Included)
Backlit Daylight
White Graphics
Area—15X Lighted Indicators
Optional as Required
17.7 [0.70]
15.2
[0.60]
17.1
[0.67]
18.5
[0.73]
15.5
[0.61]
Maximum Torque:
30 in-lbs (3.4 Nm)
32.2
[1.27]
Max.
Depth with
Mating
Connector
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T1-7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
Electronic Products
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Contents
Description Page
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-8
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-10
Product Description
Tailored to meet the same
look and feel of Eaton’s NGR
product line, the E30 eSM
offers the added benefits of
multiplexed control and
system simplification. The
E30 eSM is a below-panel
styled multiplexed rocker
module capable of
communicating via SAE
J1939 CAN 2.0b. The
modules are set up in a
master-expansion
configuration capable of
supporting up to seven
expansion modules per
master thus minimizing the
impact on a controller to a
single CAN node.
Additionally, up to eight
master modules per system
can be accommodated.
Communication with the
expansion modules is done
via a four-wire sub-bus.
Multiplexing of switches can
significantly reduce harness
costs and complexity as
well as improve installation
cycle time.
Master Expansion Modules
Master Expansion
Application Description
The E30 eSM is especially
suited for applications that
require both high current
independently wired
switches using Eaton NGR
switches as well as those
applications realizing the
benefits of multiplexing. The
E30 eSM is styled to match
the Eaton NGR switch for a
consistent look and feel to
your dash panel.
The E30 eSM also has the
capability of having a separate
input for key switch and
dimmer control functions to
increase the flexibility of the
product to interface seamlessly
to your vehicle.
Customization of the E30
eSM is done by creating an
application specific rocker
with icons representing the
function as well as by use
of colored LEDs to highlight
status. Two and three
position as well as momentary
or maintained circuits are
identified using a sub-actuato
r
to offer complete flexibility.
Target Market Segments:
●Motor coach/bus
●Specialty vehicle
●Truck
Product Selection
Note: All products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
V11-T1-8 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
Electronic Products
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Technical Data and Specifications
E30 eSM Specifications
Power Supply
A regulated 12 Vdc power
supply capable of providing
1.5A should be connected
to terminals 1, 5 and 6
of the six-pole connector
of the master module only.
All connected expansion
modules receive their
supply power from the
master module.
Diagnostics
The LED indicators at the
back of the modules show
the status of the internal
diagnostics as follows:
Diagnostics
Communication
The communication to and
from the master module is
fully compliant to the SAE
J1939/CAN 2.0b protocol.
The application-specific
J1939 message parameters
are as follows:
Transmission Repetition
Message Contents
Status
Within each status byte,
the bits are assigned to the
individual switches as follows:
where the switches are
numbered as shown
below.
Switches
The two status bit pairs
represent the switch state
in the following manner:
where the position
assignment is as shown
below.
Position Assignment
Description Specification
SAE J1455
Description Specification
Power supply 12 Vdc regulated power, 1.5A Dust test (Non-operational) SAE J726 Course
Operating temperature –40° to 85°C Mechanical vibration 2gs from 10 to 2 kHz
Storage temperature –40° to 85°C Mechanical shock 30g
Sealing IP42 Handling drop 1m, 3-axis
Illumination Dependent or search lighting, customer defined LED color Load dump transient Table 4A and 4B
Switch life cycle Reverse voltage –28 Vdc for 5 mins
Electrical life 250,000 cycles Over-voltage 48 Vdc for 5 mins
Mechanical life 250,000 cycles Under-voltage 4 Vdc for 5 mins
Radiated immunity SAE J1113/21, 100 v/m
Radiated emissions SAE J1113/41, Class 2
Dimming 0–10 Vdc Analog Input (0 = 0% and 10V = 100% brightness)
Connectors Delphi Micro VHT 15499927
Delphi Micro VHT 13513469
Label Color Meaning
J1939
ACTIVE
Red CANbus
active
MODULE
ACTIVE
Amber Sub bus
active
SWITCH
CHANGE
Green Switch
change
Description Specification
Transmission
repetition rate
100 ms
Data length 8 bytes
Data page 0
PDU format 255
PDU specific 160
Default priority 5
Parameter group
number
65440
Byte Status
Byte 1 Master module status
Byte 2 Expansion module 1 status
Byte 3 Expansion module 2 status
Byte 4 Expansion module 3 status
Byte 5 Expansion module 4 status
Byte 6 Expansion module 5 status
Byte 7 Expansion module 6 status
Byte 8 Expansion module 7 status
Bit Switch
Bit 8&7 Not defined
Bit 5&6 Switch 1 status
Bit 3&4 Switch 2 status
Bit 1&2 Switch 3 status
Switch
1
Switch
2
Switch
3
Bit Switch
00 Switch in DOWN position
01 Switch in MIDDLE position
10 Switch in UP position
11 Not defined
A = DOWN
B = MIDDLE
C = UP
ABC
Rocker
Position
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T1-9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
Electronic Products
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Wiring
The master unit is connected using six unshielded wires. The
connection from the master to the first expansion module and
between any consecutive expansion modules is made using
four unshielded wires.
Master Module
Master wiring:
●Six unshielded wires
Expansion Module
Expansion wiring:
●Four unshielded wires
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mounting Dimensions E30 eSM Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
J1939 ACTIVE
MODULE ACTIVE
SWITCH CHANGE
Pin Function
4 Vcc out
3 Ground
2 Sub bus +
1 Sub bus –
Pin Function
6 Keyswitch
5 Dimmer
4Ground
3 J1939 +
2 J1939 –
1 +12 Vdc
MODULE ACTIVE
SWITCH CHANGE
Pin Function
4 Vcc out
3Ground
2 Sub bus +
1 Sub bus –
Pin Function
4 Vcc in
3 Ground
2 Sub bus +
1 Sub bus –
Panel
Opening 1.734
(44.00)
2.835 (72.00)
1.97
(50.0)
2.99 (76.0)
0.47
(11.9)
1.22
(31.1)
0.10
(2.54)
1.85
(46.9)
2.82 (71.7) 1.70 (43.2)
If you want to mount the
modules in a panel, the
opening in the panel should
be rectangular, 2.835 in wide
and 1.732 in high (72.00 mm
wide and 44.00 mm high).
The panel thickness should
be between 0.039 and
0.157 in (1.00 and 4.00 mm).
V11-T1-10 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Electronic Products
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Contents
Description Page
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-13
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-13
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-15
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-17
Product Description
Multiplexed Master Module
using a LIN sub bus to
communicate with up to
seven expansion modules.
Offering a high level of
flexibility, the above-panel
electronic multiplex switch
module (E32 eSM) covers
your wide range of switch
and indicator applications
using standard or custom
graphics, as well as a full
range of circuits and
illumination options. The
above-panel E32 eSM has
top, center and bottom LED
lighting with software that
offers advanced circuit and
lighting flexibility, including
dimming and flashing options
via J1939 CANbus
communication. The indicator
bar can be lighted with up to
four separate colors to
indicate operational status,
vehicle mode and faults. All
standard combinations of
maintained and momentary
switch actions, matching
indicator caps and dummy
plugs, along with the
complementary styled SVR
electromechanical rocker
switch are available to
complete the offering.
Compared with
electromechanical
switches, multiplexed
switch modules offer
several advantages.
●Reduced assembly labor
due to ease of installation,
allowing for mounting and
connection of three
switches at one time
versus individually
●Reduced wire harness
complexity, using one
harness to a controller to
accommodate up to 24
switches and a three-wire
interconnect between
expansion and master
modules
●Reduced harness size
offers an overall reduction
in weight, improving
operational efficiency of
the equipment
●Increase in switch life-
cycle over traditional
electromechanical
switches (500k cycles)
Application Description
Target Market Segments
This product is targeted at the
bus/coach, truck and
specialty vehicle markets.
The product is especially
suitable where a customer
has “gangs” of switches
mounted in a panel or
dashboard, and expansion
modules can be connected
easily to a master module.
●On-road specialty vehicle
●EMS vehicles
●Street sweepers
●Recreational vehicles
●Motor coach/bus
●Refuse vehicles
Features and Benefits
●Fully compliant with J1939
CAN 2.0b messaging
●LED lighting in top, center
and bottom positions
●Late point definition of
circuit and rockers to
reduce inventory and
accommodate multiple
application requirements
●9–16 Vdc operating voltage
●16–32 Vdc operating
voltage
●IP53 degree of protection
from the front
●Easy address assignment
●Immune to SAE J1455 and
J1113 power disturbances
●Front panel removable for
ease of maintenance
●Sleep mode available to
reduce current draw on the
battery
●Wake on switch change
configurable
●Decorative-style rocker
with matching indicator
option available
●Colored rocker options
●CAN controlled digital logic
output—500 mA
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T1-11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Electronic Products
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Selection
Note: All fully-assembled products are custom ordered.
Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
Modules
Accessories
Rockers Circuit Sub-Actuators
Icons Status Bar
Voltage Module Icon Lighting Status Bar Lighting Catalog Number
9–16V Master Amber Amber E321AAAAAAAAA01
Green Green E321GGGGGGGGG01
White Red, Amber, Green, Blue E321W4WW4WW4W01
Expansion Amber Amber E322AAAAAAAAA01
Green Green E322GGGGGGGGG01
White Red, Amber, Green, Blue E322W4WW4WW4W01
Indicator expansion Amber Amber E322AAAAAAAAAI7
Green Green E322GGGGGGGGGI7
White Red, Amber, Green, Blue E322W4WW4WW4WI7
16–32V Master Amber Amber E323AAAAAAAAA01
Green Green E323GGGGGGGGG01
White Red, Amber, Green, Blue E323W4WW4WW4W01
Expansion Amber Amber E324AAAAAAAAA01
Green Green E324GGGGGGGGG01
White Red, Amber, Green, Blue E324W4WW4WW4W01
Indicator expansion Amber Amber E324AAAAAAAAAI7
Green Green E324GGGGGGGGGI7
White Red, Amber, Green, Blue E324W4WW4WW4WI7
Color Description Catalog Number
Black Full-throw actuator 53-7350
Half-throw up actuator 53-7350-2
Half-throw down actuator 53-7350-3
Red Full-throw actuator 53-7350-4
Half-throw up actuator 53-7350-5
Half-throw down actuator 53-7350-6
Black Indicator 53-7354
Dummy plug 53-7354-2
Panel plug 17-24241
Color Circuit (Up-Middle-Down) Catalog Number
Black On On None 61-4043
Red Momentary On None 61-4043-2
Light blue On On On 61-4043-3
White Momentary On Momentary 61-4043-4
Yellow Momentary On On 61-4043-5
Gray On None On 61-4043-6
Pink Momentary None On 61-4043-7
Maroon None On On 61-4043-8
Light purple None On Momentary 61-4043-9
Orange On On Momentary 61-4043-10
Green On None Momentary 61-4043-11
V11-T1-12 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Electronic Products
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Wiring
Master Module Wire
Harness
The interconnection between
master module and controller
uses a simple four-wire
harness with addressing
specified by jumping
between pins 6 to 9. An
additional pin-out is provided
for a 500 mA output if
required.
Mating Connector Information
Housing:
●ETN 28-6982
●Amp/Tyco #1394048-1
●ETN 49-7867
●Amp/Tyco #2-1355524-3
Expansion Module Wire
Harness
The interconnection between
modules uses a cost-
effective three-wire harness.
This simplified wire harness
reduces cost, weight and
assembly labor for the end-
user.
Mating Connector Information
Terminal:
●ETN 28-6983
●Amp/Tyco #1-1718346-1
Coding A
●ETN 80-20608
●Amp/Tyco #963715-1
Master Address Assignment
The master switch module
address is set using jumpers
in the wire harness to
connect the following pins:
Master Address Assignment
Manufacturing Flexibility
E32 eSM offers a
tremendous amount of
flexibility including options for
complete assemblies to be
provided as well as late-point
definable rocker and circuit.
Individual components can be
purchased independently and
assembled to create any
combination of circuits and
icons which is especially
suited for low volume/high
mix applications minimizing
inventory requirements.
Rockers and indicators can
also be laser-etched with
custom icons by Eaton or
other to accommodate
application specific
requirements. Contact your
Eaton representative to
discuss the Eaton solution
further.
Pin Function
1 VBAT
(clamp 30)
2 Ground
3 LIN sub bus
Pin Function
1VBAT
(clamp 30)
2 Ground
3 CAN high
4CAN low
5 500 mA
output
6 Address 1
7 Address 2
8 Address 3
9 Address 4
10 No connect
11 No connect
12 No connect
Pin Function
1 VBAT
(clamp 30)
2Ground
3 LIN sub bus
Pin Function
1VBAT
(clamp 30)
2 Ground
3 LIN sub bus
Terminal Pins
Connected Address
6–7 A1
6–8 A2
6–9 A3
7–8 A4
7–9 A5
8–9 A6
6–7, 8–9 A7
6–8, 7–9 A8
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T1-13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Electronic Products
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm
Mounting Instructions
The modules are easily
mounted with plastic retention
clips.
Modules are mounted
in
a single, space-saving
cutout,
reducing assembly time and
accommodating up to three
switches in a compact
design.
The unit will accommodate
1.5 to 3 mm panel thickness.
Mounting Dimensions
38.2
Max.
37.6 ± 0.3
61.4 ± 0.2
41.0 ± 0.3
38.20
3.90 4X
45°
4X
61.60
V11-T1-14 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Electronic Products
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Contents
Description Page
E33 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-22
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-22
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-22
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-23
Product Description
Sealed Multiplexed Master
Module using a LIN sub bus
to communicate with up to
seven expansion modules.
Eaton is pleased to introduce
the newest line of multiplexed
electronic Switch Modules
(eSM), the E33 product line.
The E33 eSM offers an
increased level of flexibility
over previous modules
including:
●Fully sealed to IP68 from
the front and rear
●Locking rocker options
●Palm guard option
The E33 eSM offers a
complete range of switch
circuits as well as indicator
options to meet all your
control requirements. Similar
to the E32 eSM product line,
the E33 eSM includes
individual icon lighting as well
as a multi-color center
indicator option allowing for
steady state, flashing and
dimming controlled via
messaging. Additional
flexibility is available by using
the Eaton IP68 sealed SVR
switch line for high-current,
hard-wired applications in
conjunction with our
multiplexed solution.
Compared with
electromechanical
switches, multiplexed
switch modules offer
several advantages.
●Reduced assembly labor
due to ease of installation,
allowing for mounting and
connection of three
switches at one time
versus individually
●Reduced wire harness
complexity, using one
harness to a controller to
accommodate up to 24
switches and a three-wire
interconnect between
expansion and master
modules
●Reduced harness size
offers an overall reduction
in weight, improving
operational efficiency of
the equipment
●Increase in switch life-
cycle over traditional
electromechanical
switches (500k cycles)
●Reduced connections
resulting in less possible
failure points
Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability.
Application Description
Target Market Segments
This product is targeted at
harsh environment
applications where a
ruggedized product is needed
to meet demanding
requirements. Additionally,
applications where there is
concern over inadvertent
switch actuation driving the
need for guarding or locking
features are also well-suited.
Typical applications include:
●Construction equipment
●Agricultural equipment
●Specialty vehicle
●Material handling
●Emergency vehicle
●School and transit bus
Features and Benefits
●Fully compliant with J1939
CAN 2.0b messaging
●IP68 degree of protection
front and rear
●9–32 Vdc rated
●Immune to SAE J1455 and
J1113 power disturbances
●Top, bottom and full guard
option available
●Locking rocker available
●Front panel removable for
ease of maintenance
●Sleep mode available to
reduce current draw on the
battery
●Wake on switch change
configurable
●LED lighting in top, center-
indicator and bottom
position
●Decorative style rocker
with matching indicator
option
●Late point definition of
circuit and rockers to
reduce inventory
●Diagnostics
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T1-15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Electronic Products
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Selection
Note: All fully-assembled products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
Wiring
Master/Expansion Module
Wire Harness
The interconnection between
master module and controller
uses a simple four-wire
harness. Addressing of the
master can be done by
software or via address claim
process. Interconnect wiring
between master-expansion
as well as expansion-
expansion uses a three-wire
harness.
Mating Connector Information
●Mating connector: Deutsch
plug DT06-6S
●Wedge lock: W6S
●Socket contact:
0462-201-16141
(1.0–0.5 mm2 [16–20 AWG]
●Hole plug: 0413-217-1605
Technical Data and Specifications
E33 eSM Specifications
Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability.
Pin Master Expansion
1 VBATT VBATT
2 Common Common
3 CAN High LIN
4CAN Low LIN
5 Common Common
6 LIN VBATT
Master = Black
Expansion = Gray
Pin Numbers
Description Specification
Operating temperature –40° to 85°C
Storage temperature –40° to 95°C
Operating voltage 9–32 Vdc
Environmental sealing IP68
Mechanical shock 30g for 11 ms
Mechanical vibration MIL-STD-202F/201A 2.0g random
Immunity to SAE J1455 and J1113 power disturbances
Communication
Master SAE J1939 CAN 2.0b
Expansion LIN 2.0
V11-T1-16 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Electronic Products
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Standard Cut-Out
The modules are easily
mounted with plastic retention
clips. Modules are mounted in
a single, space-saving cutout
reducing assembly time and
accommodating up to three
switches in a compact design.
Serviceability
By modifying the standard
cut-out to include the optional
front panel removable slots
shown below, the modules
are easily serviceable from
the front of the panel without
further disassembly.
Due to the E33’s design
allowing for late-point
definition on assembly, both
the actuator and circuit profile
are serviceable as individual
components.
Standard Cut-Out Optional Panel Opening Features
E33 eSM Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
E33 eSM Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units (Palm Guard Version)
Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability.
Recommended Panel Opening
Panel Thickness: 0.04–0.16 (1.0–4.0)
1.45
(36.8)
2.80 (71.1)
60º
4X
4X
0.13
(3.3)
Optional Front
Removal Slots 4X
2X 1.70
(43.2)
2X 1.83
(46.4) 2X 0.50
(1.3)
Optional
Keying
Feature
2X 0.17
(4.3)
2X 0.80
(20.4)
4X 0.17
(4.3)
1.73
(44.0)
2.91 (74.0)
0.65 (16.4)
1.44
(36.5)
1.87
(47.4)
1.75
(44.4)
Depth with
Mating
Connector
1.70
(43.2)
1.12
(28.4) Max.
0.83 (21.1)
1.89
(48.1)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T1-17
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Electronic Products
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
Contents
Description
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
Product Description
With a focus on commun-
ications, convenience and
safety, Eaton is pleased to
introduce eVU.
Rugged dashpanel displays
simplify the viewing,
selecting and inputting of
key equipment/trip data.
Working in sync with existing
controllers and networks, the
displays provide the driver
with valuable feedback on
vehicle status and
performance.
eVU displays offer a great
deal of flexibility which can
include:
●Internal warning/
alert buzzer
●Backlighted legend
displays
●Sunlight readable
LCD characters
●Internal power supply
●Analog or discrete switch
inputs
●Up to 2.5 digit character
display
●8-segment bar graph
●Individual LED control
So, what’s the e for?
Easy, electronic and
evolutionary. eVU fills
the gap (literally) between
on-board systems and
displays, ideal for application-
specific functions.
Application Description
Typical applications for
information display include:
●Temperature
●Pressure
●Speed
●Distance
●Capacity
●Transmission
●Warnings/alarms
●System information
Safety
eVU displays are easier
to access than typical
touch screens or soft-key
applications. Keeping the
dashboard displays within
the driver’s line of vision
helps keep the driver and
everyone else on the road
safe. Additionally, the eVU
displays are designed to
meet SAE-1455 specification.
What Do You Want to View?
There are many types of
eVU displays and they can
be customized with various
colors, resolutions and
character configurations.
Choose the functionality
you want with the flexibility
you need.
Features
Communication and
Networking
eVU displays can interface
with smart engines,
controllers and equipment
software via established
J1939 and J1708
communication protocols.
In addition, eVU displays
can receive input from
analog transducers and
sub-systems. Analog inputs
can be either 0–20 mA or
0–10V. Additional input
options exist for up to six
logic states.
Designed for Easy
Installation
Some advancements in
technology create installation
obstacles. That isn’t the case
with eVU. The displays fit into
the same cutouts as standard
Eaton NGR rocker switches,
0.866 x 1.732 in (22.00 x
44.00 mm), making
installation easy.
The simplified architecture
not only saves dash space,
it also saves costs.
Product Selection
Note: All products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
Mounting Instructions
Product is designed to mount in panels between 1 to 4 mm
(0.039 to 0.157 in) thick.
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
50.0
[1.97]
44.04
[1.734]
21.5 [0.85]
22.02
[0.867]
Panel Opening
26.0 [1.02] 2.7 [0.11]
50.0
[1.97]
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T2-1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Rockers
NGR
SVR
Rockette
EURO SR
ESPORT
2.1 Introduction
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-3
2.2 NGR
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-8
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-10
2.3 SVR
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-32
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-34
2.4 Dual Motion Safety Switch
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-41
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-42
2.5 1500/2500
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-43
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-44
2.6 1600/2600
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-47
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-48
2.7 Rockette
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-54
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-55
2.8 8006/8007—EURO SR
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-62
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-63
2.9 8004/8005—Euro Full Size
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-65
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-66
2.10 X Series
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-68
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-69
X Series Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-70
2.11 8064/8065 ESPORT
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-72
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-73
Icon/Legend Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-74
2.12 Accessories
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-76
2.13 Technical Data
Rocker, Toggle and Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-78
Rocker Switch Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-79
2.14 Symbol Library
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-80
NGR Only Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-85
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-95
V11-T2-2 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Rockers
Introduction
Rocker Switch Products
Contents
Description
Rocker Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-3
NGR Rocker Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-8
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-32
Dual Motion Safety Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-41
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-43
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-47
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-54
8006/8007—EURO SR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-62
8004/8005—Euro Full Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-65
X Series Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-68
8064/8065—ESPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-72
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-76
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-78
Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-80
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Rockers
Introduction
Rocker Selection Guide
See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.
Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated
NGR SVR
Features
Ratings 15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac;
15A at 28 Vdc (14 Vdc rating)
12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc
Certifications RoHS, UL® Approvable RoHS, UL Approvable
Panel Opening Rectangular Octagonal
Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width
1.734 in (44.04 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
0.830 in (21.10 mm); 0.680 in (17.30 mm)
1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm)
1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm)
Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
✔
✔
✔
✔
Poles
Single
Double
Four
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs
✔
—
—
—
✔
—
—
—
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED
—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
Catalog Number Selection Page V11-T2-10 Page V11-T2-34
Technical Data Page V11-T2-16 Page V11-T2-36
Circuit Diagrams Page V11-T2-17 Page V11-T2-37
Dimensions Page V11-T2-30 Page V11-T2-38
Icon/Legend Symbols Library Page V11-T2-80 Page V11-T2-80
V11-T2-4 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Rockers
Introduction
See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.
Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued
Dual Motion Safety Switch 1500/2500
Features
Ratings 10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac
Up to 22A at 125 Vac, 16A at 250 Vac
Certifications UL, CSA®, RoHS UL, CSA, ENEC, RoHS
Panel Opening Octagonal Rectangular
Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width
1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm)
0.830 in (21.10 mm); 0.680 in (17.20 mm)
N/A
1.075 in (27.30 ± 0.10 mm)
0.483 in (12.27 ± 0.07 mm)
0.876 in (22.25 ± 0.10 mm)
Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel
—
—
—
—
—
—
Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
—
✔
—
✔
Poles
Single
Double
Four
✔
—
—
✔
✔
—
Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
Catalog Number Selection Page V11-T2-42 Page V11-T2-44
Technical Data —Page V11-T2-46
Circuit Diagrams — Page V11-T2-78
Dimensions Page V11-T2-42 Page V11-T2-46
Icon/Legend Symbols Library — Page V11-T2-53
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Rockers
Introduction
See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.
Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued
1600/2600 Rockette
Features
Ratings Up to 22A at 125 Vac, 16A at 250 Vac Up to 15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac
Certifications UL, CSA, ENEC, RoHS UL, CSA, RoHS
Panel Opening Rectangular Octagonal
Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width
1.075 in (27.30 ± 0.10 mm)
0.483 in (12.27 ± 0.07 mm)
0.876 in (22.25 ± 0.10 mm)
1.450 in (36.83 mm); 1.190 in (30.23 mm)
0.830 in (21.80 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)
0.830 in (21.80 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)
Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel
—
—
—
✔
—
—
Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
—
✔
—
✔
Poles
Single
Double
Four
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
Catalog Number Selection Page V11-T2-48 Page V11-T2-55
Technical Data Page V11-T2-52 Page V11-T2-58
Circuit Diagrams Page V11-T2-78 Page V11-T2-78
Dimensions Page V11-T2-52 Page V11-T2-58
Icon/Legend Symbols Library Page V11-T2-53 —
V11-T2-6 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Rockers
Introduction
See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.
Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued
8006/8007 8004/8005
Features
Ratings 10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up
to 15A at 28 Vdc
10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up
to 15A at 28 Vdc
Certifications UL(CUR), RoHS UL(CUR), RoHS
Panel Opening Octagonal Rectangular
Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width
1.450 in (36.85 mm); 1.190 in (30.23 mm)
0.830 in (21.08 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)
0.830 in (21.08 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)
1.734 in (44.04 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
—
✔
Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
—
✔
—
✔
Poles
Single
Double
Four
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED
—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
Catalog Number Selection Page V11-T2-63 Page V11-T2-66
Technical Data Page V11-T2-64 Page V11-T2-67
Circuit Diagrams Page V11-T2-78 Page V11-T2-78
Dimensions Page V11-T2-64 Page V11-T2-67
Icon/Legend Symbols Library ——
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-7
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Rockers
Introduction
See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.
Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued
X Series 8064/8065
Features
Ratings 16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V
Recommended 21A 14 Vdc or 10A 28 Vdc
10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up
to 15A at 28 Vdc
Certifications UL(CUR); RoHS, T85 UL(CUR); RoHS
Panel Opening Rectangular Rectangular
Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width
1.46 in (37.00 ± 0.1 mm)
0.83 in (21.20 ± 0.1 mm)
0.83 in (21.20 ± 0.1 mm)
1.734 in (44.04 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel
✔
—
—
—
—
—
Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
✔
—
—
✔
Poles
Single
Double
Four
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED
125V LED
277V LED
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
Catalog Number Selection Page V11-T2-69 Page V11-T2-73
Technical Data Page V11-T2-70 Page V11-T2-74
Circuit Diagrams Page V11-T2-70 (Light Diagrams) Page V11-T2-78
Dimensions Page V11-T2-71 Page V11-T2-75
Icon/Legend Symbols Library Page V11-T2-70 Page V11-T2-74
V11-T2-8 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
NGR Rocker Switches
Contents
Description Page
NGR Rocker Switches
Switch Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-10
Rocker Buttons/Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-11
Lens Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-13
NGR Complete Indicators and Indicator Caps . V11-T2-14
NGR Indicator Base and Indicator Caps . . . . . . V11-T2-15
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-16
Standard Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-17
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-30
Product Description
Eaton presents its NGR
Rocker Switches. This field-
proven line of full-sized rocker
switches, initially developed
for the heavy truck industry,
is now found in a variety of
vehicle-related applications.
The NGR offers both
European styling and
ergonomic design while still
providing the solid durability
that you have come to expect
from Eaton switches.
Illuminated and non-
illuminated versions with
either incandescent bulbs or
LEDs are available in either
dependent or independent
circuits and in a variety of
popular switching circuits.
The NGR also offers a variety
of rocker buttons and
indicators with laser-etched
or pad-printed icons,
insertable lenses and
adhesive-backed labels.
Features
●Sealing
Standard switch provides
splash and dust resistance
to IP42. The sealed version is
sealed to IP67 when supplied
with panel seal.
●Rocker
The standard actuator for the
NGR is a clean, European-
styled, two-face rocker made
of high-quality thermoplastic
material. The rocker is
replaceable and snaps on and
off the switch. Both the
rocker and the bezel are
supplied with an aesthetically
pleasing matte finish.
Different colors are also
available, but black is
standard. Rockers can be
ordered separately.
●Lighting
Each switch is capable of
accommodating two
incandescent light bulbs or
LEDs for lighting purposes.
A lamp or LED can be located
at either end of the switch
and oriented to be circuit
dependent or independent.
The incandescent bulbs are
front replaceable. Two lamp
or LED voltages, 14 Vdc and
28 Vdc, are standard. For
additional voltages or colors,
consult your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
Standards and
Certifications
●Approvable under stringent
UL and CSA standards
●For information, contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-9
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Options
●Circuits
●1PST, 1PDT, 2PST
and 2PDT
●Maintained and
momentary action
●Common lamp ground
jumper for dual lamp units
●Multiple LEDs for daylight
readability
●Additional colors of
rockers, mounting bezels
and lenses are available
●Special circuits
●Special ratings
●Pad-printed legends on
lens, rocker and bezel
●Special lamps and lamp
voltages
●Dry circuit capabilities
●Custom back-lit legends
available
●Reversing jumpers
(internal)
●Gang mounting system,
see Page V11-T2-77
●Locking rocker with locking
feature in UP and/or
DOWN positions
●Indicators with laser-
etched or insertable
lenses, or adhesive labels
●IP67 rated sealed switch
●Polarized lock-on
connectors, see
Page V11-T2-76
●28-5637-2 for Packard
terminals
●28-5940 for AMP
terminals
●Panel plug 17-21543
●Replacement bulb catalog
number
●14V: 28-5901
●28V: 28-5909
For more information on
additional options, contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
Legends
Two legend areas are
provided on the ends of each
rocker of sufficient size to
accommodate two lines
consisting of four Helvetica
Narrow 12-point characters.
Legends may be non-
illuminated or illuminated.
The NGR offers three styles
of illuminated legends.
Single-piece back-lit—Back-
lighting is a high-quality
automotive/truck industry
technique. The legend can
appear daylight white or
dead-front when non-
illuminated but, depending
on the back-lit color chosen,
will change color when
illuminated. Examples of
standard back-lit legends are
found on Pages V11-T2-80 to
V11-T2-94.
Snap-in lenses—This rocker
will have either one or two
snap-in lenses in the legend
areas. Legends are typically
pad-printed on the lens in
black or white. Snap-in lenses
are available in six standard
colors and can be ordered
separately.
Label rocker—This rocker
has a one-piece adhesive-
backed label inserted into
a recessed area on the
face of the button. Legends
can be done in several
colors and be illuminated or
non-illuminated. Contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative for suggested
sources.
Flexible Ordering System
You can order assembled
switches or the switch base
and actuator separately.
Use the final code in the
switch base catalog number,
Page V11-T2-10, to denote
assembly instructions.
V11-T2-10 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Switch Base
To order rocker and switch base assembled, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11.
To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13.
To order indicator caps, see Page V11-T2-15. For a complete indicator, see Page V11-T2-14.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Switch Base
Notes
1Circuits show lighting options available. See Pages V11-T2-17 to V11-T2-29.
2Locks in DOWN position.
3Locks in UP and DOWN positions.
4Locks in UP position.
5Switch contact construction plating—
N = Standard: Recommended for use on loads up to 12 amps at 14 Vdc.
T = High Rated: Recommended for use on loads greater than 12 amps at 14 Vdc.
G = Gold: Recommended for use on dry circuit/low level switching.
6Replaceable.
7Replaceable/wedge base LED.
8PCB version LED.
Rocker and
Paddle Frame
Full Palm Guard
Panel Seal and
Internal Seal
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
N G R 1 5 0 1 4 B N A 0 N
Switch Series
(Unsealed)
NGR = Switch base
Circuit 1
1501 = Circuit
See Pages V11-T2-17
to V11-T2-29.
Frame Style
1 = Rocker and paddle
frame
2 = Palm guard (top)
3 = Palm guard (bottom)
4 = Full palm guard
(top/bottom)
S = Panel seal and
internal seal
G = Locking rocker 2
D = Locking rocker 3
F = Locking rocker 4
T = Internal seal
“A” Lamp
Type and Color
0 = No lamp
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear 6
B = 24 Vdc incand./clear 6
C = 28V LED/red 8
D = 28V LED/green 8
E = 28V LED/amber 8
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red 7
L = 28V LED/green 7
T = 28V LED/amber 7
W = 28V LED/white 7
X = 28V LED/blue 7
H
= 14V LED/high intensity red
J
= 14V LED/high intensity green
P
= 14V LED/high intensity amber
M
= 14V LED/high intensity blue
Example:
Switch
Contact Plating 5
N = Standard
T = High rated
G =Gold
Rocker
Assembled
N = No
Frame Color
B = Black
“B” Lamp
Type and Color
0 = No lamp
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear 6
B = 24 Vdc incand./clear 6
C = 28V LED/red 8
D = 28V LED/green 8
E = 28V LED/amber 8
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red 7
L = 28V LED/green 7
T = 28V LED/amber 7
W = 28V LED/white 7
X = 28V LED/blue 7
H
= 14V LED/high intensity red
J
= 14V LED/high intensity green
P
= 14V LED/high intensity amber
M
= 14V LED/high intensity blue
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-11
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Rocker Buttons/Actuators
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Rocker Buttons/Actuators
Notes
1Decorative rocker only.
2Two-face rocker only.
Two-Face
Rocker,
No Lens
Decorative
Rocker,
Back-Lit
Decorative
Paddle,
Back-Lit
Two-Face
Rocker,
Snap-In Lens
Locking
Rocker
Label
Rocker
Icon “A” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A =Red
B = Green
C = Amber
E = Blue
F =White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens
Icon “A” Orientation
A = Standard orientation
B = 90° clockwise
C = 180° clockwise
D = 270° clockwise
0 = No icon; no orientation
Icon “A” Code
AF = Unlock
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.
Icon “A” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 =White 2
4 =Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)
Icon/Lens/Hole Location
A = “A” only
B = “B” only
C = “A” and “B”
D = No icon/lens/hole
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate button type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
3 C A F A 1 B A E C 4 A 3
Rocker Button Type
1 = Two-face, no lens rocker
2 =
Two-face, snap-in lens rocker
3 = Decorative rocker, back-lit
4 = Decorative paddle, back-lit
5 = Locking rocker
6 = Label rocker
Example:
Indicator
Stripe Location
1 = “A” Position
2 = “B” Position
3 = “A” and “B” Positions
0 =No stripe
Icon “B” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
B = Green
C =Amber
E =Blue
F =White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens
Icon “B” Orientation
A = Standard orientation
B = 90° clockwise
C = 180° clockwise
D = 270° clockwise
0 = No icon; no orientation
Icon “B” Code
AE = Lock
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.
Icon “B” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 =White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)
V11-T2-12 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Icon Location Examples
Location A
Location B
Location C
Icon Orientation Examples
Orientation A
Orientation B
Orientation C
Orientation D
Rocker with Icon in
“A” Position (Code A)
Rocker with Icon in
“B” Position (Code B)
Rocker with Icon in
“C” Position (Code C)
Rocker with Standard
Orientation (Code A)
Rocker with Icon at
90° Clockwise (Code B)
Rocker with Icon at
180° Clockwise (Code C)
Rocker with Icon at
270° Clockwise (Code D)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-13
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Lens Selection
For NGR Rocker Type “2” and Indicator Type “2CAP” only.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Translucent Lenses 12
How To Order—Transparent Lenses 12
Notes
1When ordering a lens with an icon for the code B (bottom) position, specify code C orientation.
2Standard lens type.
3Non-standard lens type.
4Standard pad print for white and clear lens is black.
Translucent Lens Transparent Lens
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2 8 - 5 8 6 3 - 2 A F A
Base
Catalog Number
28-5863-2
28-5863
28-5863-3
28-5863-9
28-5863-8
Example:
Orientation Style Code
A = Standard orientation
B = Rotated 90° clockwise
C = Inverted 180°
D = Rotated 270° clockwise
Icon Code
AF = Unlock
See Symbols Library
on Pages V11-T2-80 to
V11-T2-94.
Lens
Color
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White 4
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2 8 - 5 8 6 3 - 5 A F A
Base
Catalog Number
28-5863-5
28-5863-4
28-5863-6
28-5863-10
28-5863-7
Example:
Orientation Style Code
A = Standard orientation
B = Rotated 90° clockwise
C = Inverted 180°
D = Rotated 270° clockwise
Icon Code
AF = Unlock
See Symbols Library
on Pages V11-T2-80 to
V11-T2-94.
Lens
Color
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear 4
V11-T2-14 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
NGR Complete Indicators and Indicator Caps
To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11.
To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Complete Indicator
Notes
1Decorative rocker only.
2Two-face rocker only.
Complete Indicator and
Indicator Cap Assembled
Icon “A” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A =Red
B = Green
C =Amber
E = Blue
F =White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens
Lamp/LED Type and Color
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear
B = 28 Vdc incand./clear
0 =No lamp/LED
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K =28V LED/red
L = 28V LED/green
T = 28V LED/amber
H
= 14V LED/high intensity red
J
= 14V LED/high intensity green
P
= 14V LED/high intensity amber
M
= 14V LED/high intensity blue
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate indicator type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2 N CA A R 1 B A B A 0 A
Indicator Type
2N = Two-face, snap-in lens
3N = Laser-etched
6N = Label
Example:
Icon “A” Code
AA = Horn
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.
Icon “A” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 =White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)
Icon/Lens/Hole Location
A = “A” icon only
B = “B” icon only
C = “A” and “B” icons
D = No icon/lens/hole
Icon “B” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
B = Green
C =Amber
E =Blue
F =White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens
Lamp/LED Type and Color
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear
B = 28 Vdc incand./clear
0 = No lamp/LED
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red
L = 28V LED/green
T = 28V LED/amber
H
= 14V LED/high intensity red
J
= 14V LED/high intensity green
P
= 14V LED/high intensity amber
M
= 14V LED/high intensity blue
Icon “B” Code
AB = Battery
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.
Icon “B” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 =White 2
4 =Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-15
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
NGR Indicator Base and Indicator Caps
To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11.
To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13.
To order complete indicator, see Page V11-T2-14.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Indicator Base
How To Order—Indicator Cap
Notes
1Decorative rocker only.
2Two-face rocker only.
Indicator Base Indicator Cap
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
N G R I N D A 0 N
Switch Series (Unsealed)
NGRIND = Indicator base
“A” Lamp
Type and Color
0 =No lamp
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear
B = 24 Vdc incand./clear
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red
L = 28V LED/green
T = 28V LED/amber
X = 28V LED/blue
H
= 14V LED/high intensity red
J
= 14V LED/high intensity green
P
= 14V LED/high intensity amber
M
= 14V LED/high intensity blue
Example:
Rocker
Assembled
N = No
“B” Lamp
Type and Color
0 = No lamp
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear
B = 24 Vdc incand./clear
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red
L = 28V LED/green
T = 28V LED/amber
X = 28V LED/blue
H
= 14V LED/high intensity red
J
= 14V LED/high intensity green
P
= 14V LED/high intensity amber
M
= 14V LED/high intensity blue
2 C A P CA B 1 B A H 0 A
Icon/Lens/Hole Location
A = “A” icon only
B = “B” icon only
C = “A” and “B” icons
D = No icon/lens/hole
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate indicator type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Indicator Type
2CAP = Two-face,
snap-in lens
3CAP = Decorative/
laser-etched
6CAP = Label
Example:
Icon “A” Code
AB = Battery
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.
Icon “A” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 =White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)
Icon “B” Code
AH = Fuel
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.
Icon “B” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 =White 2
4 =Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)
Icon “B” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
B = Green
C = Amber
E = Blue
F =White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens
Icon “A” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A =Red
B = Green
C =Amber
E = Blue
F =White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens
V11-T2-16 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Technical Data and Specifications
NGR Rocker Switches
Notes
1For information, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2Best results obtained between 0.060 and 0.118 in (1.5 and 3.0 mm).
3On sealed versions, recommended panel thickness between 0.079 and 0.118 in (2.0 and 3.0 mm).
Description Specification
Ratings 115A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac
15A at 28 Vdc (14 Vdc rating)
Approvable under stringent UL and CSA standards
Contact mechanism Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism
Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications
Contact material—
Standard construction
Movable—copper alloy with silver alloy contact face button
Stationary—silver-plated copper alloy with silver alloy contact face button
Mechanical life 250,000 operations, minimum
Electrical life 200,000 operations, minimum
Terminal type Standard 0.25 in (6.35 mm) spade, silver-plated copper alloy
Base material High-grade thermoplastic molding material
Dielectric 1000V rms, minimum
Mounting means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel
Mounting hole Rectangular panel cutout 1.734 x 0.867 in (44 x 22 mm)
Panel thickness 0.040 to 0.156 in (1.0 to 4.0 mm) 2 3
IP rating Standard IP42; sealed option IP67
Operating temperature
range
–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-17
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Standard Circuit Diagrams
Single-Pole Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
1001 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3
1501 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3-9
1502 OFF NONE ON
— — 2B-3-10
1503 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3
1504 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3
1505 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3-9
1506 OFF NONE ON
— — 2B-3-10
1507 OFF NONE ON
— — 2B-3-9-10
1508 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3
109
4
8
5B
6
1
3
2B
7
109
4
8
5B
61
3
2B
7
5B
10
4
61
8
2B
9
3
7
10
4
61
8
5B
9
3
7
2B
10
4
8
5B
61
9
3
2B
7
4
10
5B
16
3
9
2B
87
9
3
7
2B 5B
61
10
4
8
2B
7 8
5B
3
9
4
10
16
4
10
5B
16
8
3
9
2B
7
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
2001 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3
5B-6
2501 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3-9
5B-6
2502 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3-10
5B-6
2503 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3
5B-6
2504 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3
5B-6
2505 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3-9
5B-6
2506 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3-10
5B-6
2507 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3-9-1
5B-6
2508 OFF NONE ON
——2B-3
5B-6
10
5B
4
8
6
9
2B
1
3
7
10
4
6
5B
8
1
9
3
2B
7
1
3
910
4
6
2B
7 8
5B
109
5B
4
6
8
2B
1
3
7
109
5B
4
8
6
2B
1
3
7
10
4
61
9
3
5B
8
2B
7
10
4
61
9
3
5B
8
2B
7
2B 5B
10
4
6
9
1
3
87
7 8
10
5B
4
6
9
2B
1
3
V11-T2-18 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
1002 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3
1521 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3-9
1522 OFF NONE MOM. ON
— — 2B-3-10
1523 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3
1524 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3
1525 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3-9
1526 OFF NONE MOM. ON
— — 2B-3-10
1528 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3
10
5B
4
8
6
9
2B
1
3
7
10
4
6
5B
8
1
9
3
2B
7
10
4
6
5B
8
1
9
3
2B
7
109
5B
4
6
8
2B
1
3
7
109
5B
4
8
6
2B
1
3
7
10
4
61
9
3
5B
8
2B
7
10
4
61
9
3
5B
8
2B
7
7 8
10
5B
4
6
9
2B
1
3
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
2002 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3
5B-6
2521 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3-9
5B-6
2522 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3-10
5B-6
2523 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3
5B-6
2524 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3
5B-6
2525 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3-9
5B-6
2526 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3-10
5B-6
2528 OFF NONE MOM. ON
——2B-3
5B-6
5B
10
4
8
2B
61
9
3
7
5B
10
4
8
2B
61
9
3
7
5B
10
4
8
2B
61
9
3
7
109
5B
4
8
2B
61
3
7
5B
10
4
8
9
2B
61
3
7
10
4
61
9
3
5B
8
2B
7
5B
10
4
8
61
9
3
2B
7
5B
8
10
4
7
2B
61
9
3
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-19
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
1003 ON NONE ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1541 ON NONE ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-9
1542 ON NONE ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-10
1543 ON NONE ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1544 ON NONE ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1545 ON NONE ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-9
1546 ON NONE ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-10
1547 ON NONE ON
2B-1-10 — 2B-3-9
1548 ON NONE ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
9
7
10
1
3
2B
64
5B
8
10
5B
4
8
2B
1 6
3
9
7
4
10
16
3
8
5B2B
9
7
2B 5B
10
4
16
3
8
9
7
4
10
8
5B
316
2B
9
7
10
4
8
5B
61
3
2B
9
7
316 4
10
8
5B2B
9
7
10
4
16
3
8
5B2B
9
7
8
10
4
5B
61
2B
3
7
9
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
2003 ON NONE ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2541 ON NONE ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2542 ON NONE ON
2B-1
5B-4
—2B-3-10
5B-6
2543 ON NONE ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2544 ON NONE ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2545 ON NONE ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2546 ON NONE ON
2B-1
5B-4
—2B-3-10
5B-6
2547 ON NONE ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2548 ON NONE ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
109
7
2B
316 4
5B
8
10
5B
4
6
8
9
2B
1
3
7
4
10
61
3
9
5B
8
2B
7
5B
10
4
6
8
2B
9
1
3
7
5B
8
4
10
6
11
2B
7
3
9
910
4
6
5B
8
1
3
2B
7
64
10
5B
8
31
9
2B
7
10
4
6
5B
8
9
1
3
2B
7
8
10
5B
4
6
7
9
2B
1
3
V11-T2-20 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
1004 ON OFF ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1561 ON OFF ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-9
1562 ON OFF ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-10
1563 ON OFF ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1564 ON OFF ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1565 ON OFF ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-9
1566 ON OFF ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-10
1567 ON OFF ON
2B-1-10 — 2B-3-9
1568 ON OFF ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
5B
4
10
8
2B
61
3
9
7
4
10
8
5B
61
3
2B
9
7
10
4
8
5B
61
2B
3
9
7
5B2B
4
10
61
3
8
9
7
4
10
61
3
8
5B2B
9
7
10
4
8
5B
16
2B
3
9
7
4
10
5B
8
61
2B
3
9
7
4
10
8
5B
61
3
2B
9
7
10
4
8
5B
16
3
2B
9
7
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
2004 ON OFF ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2561 ON OFF ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2562 ON OFF ON
2B-1
5B-4
—2B-3-10
5B-6
2563 ON OFF ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2564 ON OFF ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2565 ON OFF ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2566 ON OFF ON
2B-1
5B-4
—2B-3-10
5B-6
2567 ON OFF ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2568 ON OFF ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
5B
10
4
6
8
2B
1
9
3
7
4
10
6
5B
8
1
3
9
2B
7
10
5B
8
4
6
9
2B
1
7
3
2B 5B
4
10
61
3
9
87
10
4
6
5B
8
1
9
3
2B
7
10
5B
8
46
9
2B
1
7
3
5B
10
46
8
2B
1
9
3
7
4
10
6
5B
8
13
9
2B
7
10
5B
4
8
6
9
2B
1
3
7
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-21
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
1005 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1581 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-9
1582 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-10
1583 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1584 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1585 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-9
1586 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-10
1587 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1-10 — 2B-3-9
1588 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
6
10
8
4
5B
1
2B
3
9
7
6
8
10
4
5B
7
1
3
2B
9
6
10
4
1
3
9
8
5B
2B
7
64
10
8
5B
3
9
1
2B
7
910
6
8
4
5B
1
3
2B
7
6
10
4
8
5B
1
3
2B
9
7
64
10
8
5B
1
3
2B
9
7
6
10
8
4
5B
1
3
2B
9
7
6
10
4
8
5B
1
3
9
2B
7
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
2005 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2581 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2582 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—2B-3-10
5B-6
2583 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2584 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2585 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2586 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—2B-3-10
5B-6
2587 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2588 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
10
4
8
5B
6
9
2B
1
3
7
7 8
4
10
5B
6
2B
1
3
9
10
4
61
9
3
8
5B
2B
7
3 4
109
8
5B
6
2B
1
7
910
8
4
5B
6
7
2B
1
3
10
4
6
8
5B
1
9
3
2B
7
4
6
10
8
5B
1
3
9
2B
7
10
4
8
5B
6
9
2B
1
3
7
10
4
61
9
3
8
5B
2B
7
V11-T2-22 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
1006 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1601 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-9
1602 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-10
1603 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1604 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1605 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-9
1606 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-10
1607 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1-10 — 2B-3-9
1608 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
10
4
8
5B
16
3
2B
9
7
8
4
10
5B
16
2B
3
7
9
4
10
16
3
9
8
5B2B
7
3 4
10
8
5B
16
2B
9
7
10
8
4
5B
16
2B
3
9
7
4
10
8
5B
61
3
2B
9
7
4
10
8
5B
316
2B
9
7
10
4
8
5B
16
2B
3
9
7
4
10
61
3
8
5B2B
9
7
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
2006 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2601 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2602 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—2B-3-10
5B-6
2603 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2604 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2605 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2606 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
—2B-3-10
5B-6
2607 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2608 ON OFF MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
10
5B
8
4
6
9
2B
1
7
3
8
5B
10
4
6
7
2B
1
9
3
4
10
61
3
9
5B
8
2B
7
4
10
5B
8
6
3
9
2B
1
7
10
8
5B
4
6
9
7
2B
1
3
4
10
6
5B
8
1
3
9
2B
7
64
10
5B
8
31
9
2B
7
10
5B
8
4
6
9
2B
1
7
3
4
10
6
5B
8
1
3
9
2B
7
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-23
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
1007 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1621 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-9
1622 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-10
1623 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1624 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1625 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-9
1626 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1 — 2B-3-10
1627 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1-10 — 2B-3-9
1628 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1 — 2B-3
1346
78
910
2B 5B
13 4
6
78
910
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
1346
78
910
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
9
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
2007 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2621 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2622 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1
5B-4
—2B-3-10
5B-6
2623 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2624 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
2625 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2626 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1
5B-4
—2B-3-10
5B-6
2627 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
— 2B-3-9
5B-6
2628 ON NONE MOM ON
2B-1
5B-4
— 2B-3
5B-6
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
1
346
78
910
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
1
34
6
78
910
2B 5B
V11-T2-24 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
3003 OFF ON ON
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3
3541 OFF ON ON
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3-9
3542 OFF ON ON
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3-10
3543 OFF ON ON
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3
3544 OFF ON ON
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3
3545 OFF ON ON
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3-9
3546 OFF ON ON
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3-10
3547 OFF ON ON
2A-1-10 2A-2B 2B-3-9
3548 OFF ON ON
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3
10
4
5A 8
61
2B
3
9
75B
2A
2A
5B
7
9
3
2B
16
8
5A
4
10
2A
5B
7
9
3
2B
16
8
5A
4
10
2A
5B
7
9
3
2B
16
8
5A
4
10
2A
5B
7
9
3
2B
16
8
5A
4
10
2A
5B
7
9
3
2B
16
8
5A
4
10
2A
5B
7
9
3
2B
16
8
5A
4
10
2A
5B
7
9
3
2B
16
8
5A
4
10
2A
5B
7
9
3
2B
16
8
5A
4
10
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
3004 OFF ON ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
3561 OFF ON ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
3562 OFF ON ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-10
5B-6
3563 OFF ON ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
3564 OFF ON ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
3565 OFF ON ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
3566 OFF ON ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-10
5B-6
3567 OFF ON ON
2A-1-10
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
3568 OFF ON ON
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
2A
7
9
3
2B
16
8
4
10
5B
5A
10
4
8
61
2B
3
9
7
2A 5A
5B
10
4
8
61
2B
3
9
7
2A 5A
5B
10
4
8
61
2B
3
9
7
2A 5A
5B
10
4
8
61
2B
3
9
7
2A 5A
5B
10
4
8
61
2B
3
9
7
2A 5A
5B
10
4
8
61
2B
3
9
7
2A 5A
5B
10
4
8
61
2B
3
9
7
2A 5A
5B
10
4
8
61
2B
3
9
7
2A 5A
5B
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-25
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
5001 ON NONE OFF
2B-1 — —
5501 ON NONE OFF
2B-1-9 — —
5502 ON NONE OFF
2B-1-10 — —
5503 ON NONE OFF
2B-1 — —
5504 ON NONE OFF
2B-1 — —
5505 ON NONE OFF
2B-1-9 — —
5506 ON NONE OFF
2B-1-10 — —
5507 ON NONE OFF
2B-1-9-10 — —
5508 ON NONE OFF
2B-1 — —
5B
7
9
2B
31
6
8
4
10
5B
7
9
2B
31 6
8
4
10
5B
7
3
2B
16
9
8
4
10
5B
7
2B
9
3 1 6
8
4
10
5B
7
9
2B
31 6
8
4
10
5B
7
9
2B
3 61
8
10
4
5B
7
9
16
2B
3
8
4
10
3
2B
61
9
7
10
4
8
5B
5B
7
2B
9
361
8
10
4
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
5510 ON NONE OFF
2B-1
5B-4
——
5511 ON NONE OFF
2B-1-9
5B-4
——
5512 ON NONE OFF
2B-1-10
5B-4
——
5513 ON NONE OFF
2B-1
5B-4
——
5514 ON NONE OFF
2B-1
5B-4
——
5515 ON NONE OFF
2B-1-9
5B-4
——
5516 ON NONE OFF
2B-1-10
5B-4
——
5517 ON NONE OFF
2B-1-9-10
5B-4
——
5518 ON NONE OFF
2B-1
5B-4
——
2B
78
5B
3
910
4
61
87
3
2B
910
4
61
5B
9
2B
3
7
10
4
8
61
5B
3
9
2B
7
10
4
8
61
5B
3
2B
7
4
8
61
5B
910
2B
7 8
5B
3
9
4
10
16
87
3
2B
910
4
61
5B
7
9
2B
3
5B
8
4
10
16
3
9
2B
7
4
10
8
16
5B
V11-T2-26 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Single-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
5002 MOM. ON NONE OFF
2B-1 — —
5521 MOM. ON NONE OFF
2B-1-9 — —
5522 MOM. ON NONE OFF
2B-1-10 — —
5523 MOM. ON NONE OFF
2B-1 — —
5524 MOM. ON NONE OFF
2B-1 — —
5525 MOM. ON NONE OFF
2B-1-9 — —
5526 MOM. ON NONE OFF
2B-1-10 — —
5528 MOM. ON NONE OFF
2B-1 — —
2B
7
9
3
5B
16 4
8
10
7
9
3
2B 5B
1 6 4
8
10
7
3
2B 5B
1 6 4
8
910
7
2B 5B
8
9
31 6 4
10
3
7
2B
9
4
5B
16
10
8
2B
7
9
3
5B
16 4
8
10
7
9
3
2B 5B
16 4
8
10
7
2B 5B
8
9
316 4
10
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
5003 ON ON OFF
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3
5541 ON ON OFF
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3-9
5542 ON ON OFF
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3-10
5543 ON ON OFF
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3
5544 ON ON OFF
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3
5545 ON ON OFF
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3-9
5546 ON ON OFF
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3-10
5547 ON ON OFF
2A-1-10 2A-2B 2B-3-9
5548 ON ON OFF
2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3
5A
9
7
61
5B
2B
3
2A
10
4
8
5A
7
9
5B
16
3
2B
2A
8
4
10
5A
9
7
16
5B
3
2B
2A
4
10
8
5A
7
16
5B
3
2B
2A
9
4
8
10
5A
75B
2B
9
163
2A
8
4
10
5A
7
9
5B
16
3
2B
2A
8
4
10
5A
7
9
5B
16
3
2B
2A
8
4
10
5A
9
7
16
5B
3
2B
2A
4
10
8
5A
9
7
16
5B
3
2B
2A
4
10
8
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-27
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Tw o - Po l e
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
3001 ON ON ON
5B-4-2B-1 5B-4-2B-3 2B-3
5B-6
3501 ON ON ON
5B-4-2B-1 5B-4-2B-3-9 2B-3-9
5B-6
3502 ON ON ON
5B-4-2B-1 5B-4-2B-3-10 2B-3-10
5B-6
3503 ON ON ON
5B-4-2B-1 5B-4-2B-3 2B-3
5B-6
3504 ON ON ON
5B-4-2B-1 5B-4-2B-3 2B-3
5B-6
3505 ON ON ON
5B-4-2B-1 5B-4-2B-3 2B-3
5B-6
3506 ON ON ON
5B-4-2B-1 5B-4-2B-3 2B-3
5B-6
3507 ON ON ON
5B-4-2B-1 5B-4-2B-3-9 2B-3-9
5B-6
3508 ON ON ON
5B-4-2B-1 5B-4-2B-3 2B-3
5B-6
9
7
4
2B
316
5B
10
8
7
2B
8
5B
9
163
10
4
7
9
16
2B
3
8
10
5B
4
7
43
2B 5B
61
8
910
9
7
43
2B 5B
61
10
8
10
8
5B
4613
2B
7
9
10
8
5B
461
2B
3
7
9
163 4
2B 5B
10
87
9
9
7
43
2B 5B
61
10
8
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
3002 OFF 1–ON 2–ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
3521 OFF 1–ON 2–ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
3522 OFF 1–ON 2–ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-6
3523 OFF 1–ON 2–ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
3524 OFF 1–ON 2–ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
3525 OFF 1–ON 2–ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
3526 OFF 1–ON 2–ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-6
3527 OFF 1–ON 2–ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
3528 OFF 1–ON 2–ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
31
9
2B
7
4
10
6
5B
8
2B 5B
3 461
8
10
7
9
2B
7
9
3
8
4
5B
61
10
2B
31
9
7
4
5B
10
6
8
13
2B
9
7
4
10
6
5B
8
9
3
7
2B
614
5B
8
10
2B
7
13
9
5B
8
10
4
6
9
3
7
2B
6 4
10
8
5B
1
3 1
2B
9
7
4
10
6
5B
8
V11-T2-28 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Tw o - Po l e
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
3005 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3
5B-6
3581 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3-9
5B-6
3582 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3-10
5B-6
3583 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3
5B-6
3584 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3
5B-6
3585 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3-9
5B-6
3586 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3-10
5B-6
3587 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
2B-1-10
5B-6
2B-3-9
5B-6
3588 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-6
2B-3
5B-6
1
2B
3
7
9
8
5B
4
10
6
1
3
2B
9
7
6
10
4
5B
8
1
9
3
2B
7
10
64
5B
8
316 4
2B
7 8
5B
910
1
2B
7
3
9
8
5B
10
4
6
1
3
2B
9
7
6
10
4
5B
8
1
3
2B
7
9
6
10
4
5B
8
13
2B
9
7
6 4
5B
10
8
1
2B
3
7 8
4
5B
6
910
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
4001 NONE ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
4501 NONE ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
4502 NONE ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-6
4503 NONE ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
4504 NONE ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
4505 NONE ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
4506 NONE ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-6
4507 NONE ON MOM. ON
2B-1-10
5B-4
2B-1-10
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
4508 NONE ON MOM. ON
2B-1
5B-4
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
87
2B
9
5B
41
10
63
9
7
3 61
2B
10
4
5B
8
9
7
3 61
2B
10
4
5B
8
7
9
8
10
2B
316 4
5B
7
9
8
10
2B
14
5B
63
9
7
3 61
2B
10
4
5B
8
3 61
2B
10
4
5B
87
9
3 61
2B
4
5B
9
7
10
8
78
910
2B
14
5B
63
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-29
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Tw o - Po l e
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
5004 ON ON OFF
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
5561 ON ON OFF
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
5562 ON ON OFF
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-10
5B-6
5563 ON ON OFF
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
5564 ON ON OFF
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
5565 ON ON OFF
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
5566 ON ON OFF
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-10
5B-6
5567 ON ON OFF
2A-1-10
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3-9
5B-6
5568 ON ON OFF
2A-1
5A-4
2A-2B
5A-5B
2B-3
5B-6
2B
3
9
7
5A
5B
10
4
8
61
2A
7
9
3
2B 5B
5A
2A
16
8
4
10
7
9
3
2B 5B
5A
2A
16
8
4
10
7
3
2B 5B
5A2A
16
8
4
910
7
2B 5B
8
9
3
5A2A
16 4
10
7
9
3
2B 5B
5A
2A
16
8
4
10
7
9
3
2B 5B
5A
2A
16
8
4
10
7
9
3
2B 5B
5A
2A
16
8
4
10
7
3
2B 5B
5A
2A
16
8
4
910
Circuit with Rocker In …
Circuit No.
Schematic
(Shown in UP Position)
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
5005 2–ON 1–ON OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
5581 2–ON 1–ON OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
5582 2–ON 1–ON OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-6
5583 2–ON 1–ON OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
5584 2–ON 1–ON OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3
5B-6
5585 2–ON 1–ON OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
5586 2–ON 1–ON OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-4
2B-3-10
5B-6
5587 2–ON 1–ON OFF
2B-1-10
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
5588 2–ON 1–ON OFF
2B-1
5B-4
2B-3
5B-4
2B-3-9
5B-6
6001 ON NONE ON
2A-2B-5A-5B-
10-1-4-3
— 3-6-1
7
2B
9
3
8
5B
6
10
41
7
3
2B
9
8
16 4
5B
10
7
2B 5B
8
3
910
1 6 4
7
9
3
2B
8
6
10
5B
4
1
7
9
2B
3
8
5B
6
10
4
1
2B
7
3
910
8
5B
4
16
3
7
2B
9
64
8
5B
1
10
2B
7
5B
8
3
9
1
10
4
6
7
9
2B
3
8
5B
6
10
41
72B
2A
31
9645B
5A
8
10
V11-T2-30 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Switch Base with Rocker Button
0.523 ± 0.005
(13.28 ± 0.13)
0.257 ± 0.005
(6.53 ± 0.13)
1.800 Max.
(45.42 Max.)
0.667 ± 0.005
(16.94 ± 0.13)
0.401 ± 0.005
(10.19 ± 0.13)
4 1
79
8
2B
2A
USA
3
10
5B
5A
6
0.855 ± 0.010
(21.72 ± 0.25)
0.462 ± 0.005
(11.73 ± 0.13)
0.100 ± 0.005
(2.54 ± 0.13)
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
1.024 ± .010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
C
B
A
0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)
1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.13) Panel Opening
Panel Thickness:
0.039 to 0.157 in
(1.00 to 4.00) mm
(Best results
obtained between
0.059 and 0.118 in
[1.50 and 3.00 mm])
0.054 ± 0.005
(1.37 ± 0.13)
0.500 ± 0.010
(12.70 ± 0.25)
AREA “B”
LEGEND
On Indicator “A” On Indicator “B”
7 4 5A 5B 6 8
1032B2A19
0.250 ± 0.005
(6.35 ± 0.13)
0.408 ± 0.010
(10.36 ± 0.25)
0.345 ± 0.010
(8.76 ± 0.25)
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
0.500 Max.
(12.70 Max.)
0.320 Max.
(8.13 Max.)
0.500 Max.
(12.70 Max.)
ROAD
LAMP
Orientation
Examples of “Standard”
Orientation of Icons
0.144 ± 0.005
(3.66 ± 0.13)
Terminals
8 and 10
Terminals
7 and 9
Decorative
Rocker
SIL Rocker
(Snap-In Lens)
AREA “A”
LEGEND
AREA “B”
LEGEND
AREA “A”
LEGEND
0.320 Max.
(8.13 Max.)
0.0305/0.032
(0.775/0.813)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-31
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Locking Rocker
Indicator
Sealed Rocker
Label Rocker
A
B
C
LEGEND
0.345 ± 0.010
(8.76 ± 0.25)
AREA “B”
0.245 ± 0.005
(6.22 ± 0.13)
0.320 ± 0.005 Max.
(8.13 ± 0.13 Max.)
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
1.024 ± 0.010
(26.0 ± 0.25) 0.500 ± 0.005 Max.
(12.70 ± 0.13 Max.)
1.800 Max.
(45.42 Max.)
0.100 ± 0.005
(2.54 ± 0.13)
0.408 ± 0.010
(10.36 ± 0.25)
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
1.800 Max.
(45.42 Max.)
0.100 ± 0.005
(2.54 ± 0.13)
1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
0.095 ± 0.005
(2.42 ± 0.13)
0.500 Max.
(12.70 Max.)
0.320 Max.
(8.13 Max.)
0.408 ± 0.010
(10.36 ± 0.25)
LEGEND
AREA “A”
LEGEND
AREA “B”
0.0305/0.032
(0.775/0.813)
C
A
B
1.450 ± 0.040
(36.83 ± 1.02)
0.060 ± 0.010
(1.52 ± 0.25)
Panel Seal
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
0.500 Max.
(12.70 Max.)
0.320 Max.
(8.13 Max.)
0.408 ± 0.010
(10.36 ± 0.25)
0.345 ± 0.010
(8.76 ± 0.25)
0.420 ± 0.005
(10.67 ± 0.13)
LEGEND
AREA “A”
LEGEND
AREA “B”
12° ± 1°
0.580 ± 0.008
(14.73 ± 0.020)
1.128 ± 0.010
(28.65 ± 0.25)
0.020 ± 0.005
(5.08 ± 0.13)
R0.060 ± 0.005
(R1.52 ± 0.13)
0.470 ± 0.010
(11.94 ± 0.25)
0.375 ± 0.010
(9.53 ± 0.25)
Surface Length Along Bottom
Note: Graphics window may be on both ends or either end of part.
Dimensions shown are typical.
Rotated 12° CCW
Graphics Window
V11-T2-32 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rocker
Contents
Description Page
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Above Panel Rocker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-34
Below Panel Rocker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-35
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-36
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-37
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-38
Product Description
The Sealed Vehicle Rocker
(SVR) switch from Eaton’s
electrical business now offers
an above panel actuator style
in addition to the below panel
and paddle actuators.
Designed to meet the severe
environmental requirements
of the construction and
agricultural vehicle markets,
the SVR is sealed at the front
and back of the switch and
meets the rigorous sealing
requirements of IP68.
The small switch footprint
minimizes the space taken
on switch panels. SVR
switches are assembled into
panels by pressing the switch
through the top of the panel
and are held in place by
retention tabs molded into
the body of the switch;
mounting hardware or special
tools are not necessary.
The SVR is offered in single-
and two-pole switch circuits,
with two- and three-position
momentary and maintained
circuits available. Switch
and illumination circuits are
terminated with 0.11 in
(2.8 mm) tin-plated copper
alloy spade terminals. The
SVR connector can be
loaded with the appropriate
terminals and/or wire seals
to accomplish sealing at the
back end of the switch.
Features
You can order assembled
switches or the switch base
and actuator separately.
Use the final code in the
switch base catalog number,
Pages V11-T2-34 and
V11-T2-35, to denote
assembly instructions.
Actuator
The SVR switch family
includes three styles of
actuators: above panel,
below panel and paddle.
Switch performance and
specifications are the same
for all actuator styles. Black is
standard, but other colors are
also available. Matte finish
is standard on all actuator
styles, matching the finish on
the bezels and all other visible
SVR switch features and
accessories.
Actuator Styles
●Above panel rocker button
offers new styling and a
larger surface area. Eaton
can offer assistance with
unique designs of above
panel actuators for
applications where
differentiation is desired
●Below panel rocker button
is the same two-faced
European styling that has
been offered for SVR since
its initial release. Indicator
style matches the below
panel rocker button style
●Paddle actuator allows
toggle-type actuation of
the SVR switch
Standards and
Certifications
●Approvable under stringent
UL and CSA standards
●For information, contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-33
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Illumination
Long life LEDs provide
backlighting illumination for
the SVR switch. Backlighting
can be either independent of
or dependent on the switch
circuits, or a combination of
both. Standard LED color is
amber, with red, green and
blue also available. LED
protection circuitry is
available to protect the LED
from overvoltage and reverse
voltage conditions.
Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for
more specific information
about standard and custom
circuit options.
Backlighting
●Each switch can
accommodate up to two
LEDs that can be
connected to be either
circuit dependent or
independent
●Standard LED color is
amber, with red, green and
blue also available. Long
life (100,000 hours) LEDs
are standard
●Standard LED voltages are
12 and 24 Vdc
●The below panel rocker
button style includes a
single-piece back-lit
actuator with laser-etched
icons in either daylight
white or deadfront styles.
Without illumination, the
icon is either daylight
white or deadfront, but
will change to the color of
the chosen light source
when illuminated
Snap-in Lenses
●Above and below panel
rocker buttons are available
with or without one or two
translucent lenses. Five
standard lens colors are
available: white, red,
green, blue and amber
Icons
●Icon areas are provided
on each end of the rocker
button. Icons may be
illuminated or non-
illuminated and are pad-
printed in a contrasting
color either directly on the
rocker button or the lens
Mounting Means
Snap-in mounting using four
flexible plastic retainers
integral with switch frame.
Circuits
The SVR switch is capable of
single- or two-pole
configurations with two- or
three-position maintained,
momentary or a combination
of actuations.
The addition of jumpers
between switch terminals
expands the circuit
possibilities.
Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for
more specific information
about SVR standard and
custom circuit options.
Standard Circuit Options
●ON–NONE–ON
●ON–OFF–ON
●ON*–OFF–ON*
●ON*–OFF–ON
●ON–ON–ON
●ON*–NONE–ON
●ON*–ON–ON*
●ON*–ON–ON
Note: * = Momentary. See
Electrical Circuit Diagrams on
Page V11-T2-37.
Sealing
SVR design includes a sealed
contact chamber with dust
and water resistance to IP68.
The harness connection can
also be sealed by using AMP
wire seals Catalog Number
828905-1 (14–16 gauge)
or 828904-1 (18–20 gauge)
to seal the wires to the
connector. For an application
where a connector cavity is
not being used, it can be
sealed with AMP sealing plug
Catalog Number 828922-1.
The above panel version
may also be sealed to the
panel using panel seal
Catalog Number 32-2245.
Options
●Additional colors of
actuators, mounting bezels
and lenses
●Special circuits
●Special ratings
●Pad printing on the below
panel switch bezel
●Low current capabilities
●Custom back-lit icons
●Gang-mount system
including end bezel Catalog
Number 17-22146 and
center bezel 17-22152
●Palm Guard (below panel
switch only) at either or
both ends of the switch
frame
●Indicators with insertable
lenses
●Polarized lock-on
connector Catalog
Number 25-13936
●Panel plug with connector
retention feature Catalog
Number 17-22145
●Non-illuminated below
panel paddle actuator
Note: Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for
additional information on options.
V11-T2-34 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Above Panel Rocker Switch
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Above Panel Rocker Switch
Notes
1Gold plated.
2Two-pole only. See Electrical Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-37 and Illumination Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-38.
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate switch series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
SA C M2 X D G A T RA C X X
Switch Series
S = SVR
LED (Top/Left)
1st Digit
X = None
14V Standard
J =Red
K = Green
L = Amber (standard)
M =Blue
14V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection
1 =Red
2 = Green
3 = Amber (standard)
7 =Blue
28V Standard
E =Red
F = Green
G = Amber (standard)
H =Blue
28V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection
4 =Red
5 = Green
6 = Amber (standard)
8 =Blue
Example:
KEY: * = Momentary, (I) = Independent, (D) = Dependent.
Switch Circuits/Illumination Circuits
1st Digit (Circuit) 2nd Digit (Illumination)
Single-Pole Illumination
A = ON–NONE–ON
C = ON–NONE–ON 1
D = ON–OFF–ON
E = ON–OFF–ON 1
F = ON*–OFF–ON*
G = ON*–OFF–ON* 1
H = ON*–OFF–ON
J = ON*–OFF–ON 1
K =ON–ON–ON 2
L =ON–ON–ON 12
M = ON*–NONE–ON
P = ON*–NONE–ON 1
R = ON*–ON–ON* 2
S = ON*–ON–ON* 12
T = ON*–ON–ON
U = ON*–ON–ON 1
A = None
C = Top/left (D)
D = Bottom/right (D)
E = Top/left (I)
F = Bottom/right (I)
G = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I)
H = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D)
J = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D)
K = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)
Two-Pole Illumination
R = None
S = Top/left (D)
T = Bottom/right (D)
U = Top/left (I)
V = Bottom/right (I)
W = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I)
Y = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D)
3 = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D)
4 = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)
LED Wavelengths:
Red = ~630 Nm
Amber = ~592 Nm
Green = ~526 Nm
Blue = ~472 Nm
LED (Bottom/Right)
2nd Digit
X = None
Same codes available as 1st digit.
Lens Color (Top/Left)
X = None
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
A = Amber
W = White
Lens Color (Bottom/Right)
X = None
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
A = Amber
W = White
Icon (Top/Left)
XX = None
AT = Work light
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and
V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.
Special Feature
X = None
For Eaton use only.
Icon (Bottom/Right)
XX = None
AC = Fast
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and
V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.
Frame
M = Standard
Actuator Style
C = No lens
D = Top/left lens only
E = Bottom/right lens only
F = Top/left and
Bottom/right lenses
Special Feature
X = None
For Eaton use only.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-35
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Below Panel Rocker Switch
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Below Panel Rocker Switch
Notes
1Gold plated.
2Two-pole only. See Electrical Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-37 and Illumination Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-38.
KEY: * = Momentary, (I) = Independent, (D) = Dependent.
Switch Circuits/Illumination Circuits
1st Digit (Circuit) 2nd Digit (Illumination)
Single-Pole Illumination
A = ON–NONE–ON
C = ON–NONE–ON 1
D = ON–OFF–ON
E = ON–OFF–ON 1
F = ON*–OFF–ON*
G = ON*–OFF–ON* 1
H = ON*–OFF–ON
J = ON*–OFF–ON 1
K =ON–ON–ON 2
L =ON–ON–ON 12
M = ON*–NONE–ON
P = ON*–NONE–ON 1
R = ON*–ON–ON* 2
S = ON*–ON–ON* 12
T = ON*–ON–ON
U = ON*–ON–ON 1
A = None
C = Top/left (D)
D = Bottom/right (D)
E = Top/left (I)
F = Bottom/right (I)
G = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I)
H = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D)
J = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D)
K = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)
Two-Pole Illumination
R = None
S = Top/left (D)
T = Bottom/right (D)
U = Top/left (I)
V = Bottom/right (I)
W = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I)
Y = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D)
3 = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D)
4 = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)
1st and 2nd Digit Indicators
NE = 7–9 Illumination
NF = 8–10 Illumination
NK = Dual Illumination
N9 = Dual Illumination with 8–9 jumper Lens Color (Bottom/Right)
X = None
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
A = Amber
W = White
Decorative Icon Color
1 = Daylight white
2 = Deadfront
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate switch series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
SA C S2 X 3 G A T RA C X X
Switch Series
S = SVR
LED (Top/Left)
1st Digit
X =None
14V Standard
J =Red
K =Green
L = Amber (standard)
M = Blue
14V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection
1 =Red
2 = Green
3 = Amber (standard)
7 = Blue
28V Standard
E =Red
F =Green
G = Amber (standard)
H = Blue
28V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection
4 =Red
5 =Green
6 = Amber (standard)
8 = Blue
Example:
LED Wavelengths:
Red = ~630 Nm
Amber = ~592 Nm
Green = ~526 Nm
Blue = ~472 Nm
LED (Bottom/Right)
2nd Digit
X = None
Same codes available as 1st digit.
Lens Color (Top/Left)
X = None
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
A = Amber
W = White
Decorative Icon Color
1 = Daylight white
2 = Deadfront
Icon (Top/Left)
XX = None
AT = Work light
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and
V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.
Special Feature
X = None
For Eaton use only.
Icon (Bottom/Right)
XX = None
AC = Fast
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and
V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.
Frame
S = Standard—Below panel
T = Palm Guard—Top/left
B = Palm Guard—Bottom/right
F = Palm Guard—Full
Actuator Style
1 = No lens
2 = Top/left lens only
3 = Bottom/right lens only
4 = Top/left and bottom/right lenses
5 = Paddle—No lens
6 = Indicator—Top/left lens
7 =
Indicator—Bottom/right lens
8 = Indicator—Top/left and Bottom/
right lens
9 = Indicator—No lens
A = Decorative rocker
Special Feature
X = None
For Eaton use only.
V11-T2-36 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Technical Data and Specifications
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rocker
Note
1See also Sealing, Page V11-T2-33, for additional AMP components to seal the connector interface.
Description Specification
Ratings 12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc, can be approved under stringent UL and CSA standards
Electrical life
Standard plating 50,000 operations at 12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc. Life cycle testing conducted using both inductive and
resistive loads
Gold plating 250,000 (maintained circuits)/50,000 (momentary circuits) operations
at 10 mA at either 12 or 24 Vdc
Mechanical life
Maintained circuits 250,000 operations minimum
Momentary circuits 50,000 operations minimum
Circuits Single- or two-pole, two- or three-position, with momentary and
maintained capabilities
Dielectric strength 1500 volts rms minimum
Operate force 1–3 lbs (4.4–13.2 Nm) depending on circuit configuration and actuator style
Temperature
Operating range –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
Storage range –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
Contact material
Movable Copper alloy with silver alloy contact surface
Stationary Silver-plated copper alloy with silver alloy contact surface
Gold-plated Contacts are available for low level electrical loads
Terminal type Standard 0.11 in (2.8 mm) tin-plated copper alloy spade terminal
Mates to AMP Junior Power Timer Terminals 1
Catalog Number 927766-3 (14–16 gauge)
Catalog Number 927770-3 (18–20 gauge)
Plastic component UL ratings
Base material UL 94 V-O
Frame material UL 94 H-B
IP rating IP68
Sub-actuator material UL 94 V-O
Actuator material UL 94 V-0 (above panel rocker button)
UL 94 H-B (below panel rocker button and paddle actuator)
Mounting hole Standard panel cutout of 1.45 x 0.83 in (36.8 x 21.1 mm)
Panel thickness 0.04 to 0.16 in (1.0 to 4.0 mm)
Best results obtained between 0.06 and 0.12 in (1.5 and 3.0 mm)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-37
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Circuit Diagrams
Switch Circuit Schematics
Code
Single-Pole Schematic
(Shown in Top/left
Actuated Position)
TOP/
LEFT
Actuated
CENTER BOTTOM/
RIGHT
Actuated
A
C (Gold)
ON NONE ON
2–3 — 2–1
D
E (Gold)
ON OFF ON
2–3 — 2–1
F
G (Gold)
MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2–3 — 2–1
H
J (Gold)
MOM. ON OFF ON
2–3 — 2–1
K
L (Gold)
Two-pole only
M
P (Gold)
MOM. ON NONE ON
2–3 — 2–1
R
S (Gold)
Two-pole only
T
U (Gold)
MOM. ON ON ON
2–3 2–1 2–1
10
8
9
1
6
4
5
7
23
10
8
9
1
6
4
5
7
23
9
7
23
1
6
4
10
5
8
9
7
23
1
6
4
5
10
8
9
7
23
1
6
4
5
10
8
9
7
23
1
6
4
5
10
8
Code
Two-Pole Schematic
(Shown in Top/left
Actuated Position)
TOP/
LEFT
Actuated
CENTER BOTTOM/
RIGHT
Actuated
A
C (Gold)
ON NONE ON
2–3
5–6
—
—
2–1
5–4
D
E (Gold)
ON OFF ON
2–3
5–6
—
—
2–1
5–4
F
G (Gold)
MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
2–3
5–6
—
—
2–1
5–4
H
J (Gold)
MOM. ON OFF ON
2–3
5–6
—
—
2–1
5–4
K
L (Gold)
ON ON ON
2–3
5–6
5–4–2–3 5–4–2–1
M
P (Gold)
MOM. ON NONE ON
2–3
5–6
—
—
2–1
5–4
R
S (Gold)
MOM. ON ON MOM. ON
2–3
5–6
5–4–2–3 5–4–2–1
T
U (Gold)
MOM. ON ON ON
2–3
5–6
2–1
5–4
2–1
5–4
3
810
1
6
4
5
2
79
1
6
4
8
5
10
3
7
2
9
1
6
4
5
810
3
2
79
6
4
5
810
3
1
7
2
9
9
3
2
7
1
6
54
10
8
810
3
1
6
4
2
5
79
9
3
2
7
1
6
54
10
8
1
6
4
5
810
3
7
2
9
V11-T2-38 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Illumination Schematics
Note
1LED for terminals 7–9 is at
top/left side of switch.
LED for terminals 8–10 is at
bottom/right of switch.
Single-
Pole
Code
Two-
Pole
Code Schematic 1
ARNone
CS
DT
EU
FV
GW
HY
J3
K4
Illumination
Code Schematic 1
9
79
3
+
810
+
9
+
7
810
3
+
79
810
8+
10
9
+
7
+
7
3
9
10
+
8
9
3
+
7
810
+
8
+
7
+
10
9
3
1
8
7
+
10
+
9
8
+
7
+
10
9
Dimensions
Above Panel Rocker
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Above Panel Rocker Switch with Actuator
Panel Seal Gasket (Above Only) Panel Opening (Above and Below)
0.807 ± 0.010
(20.50 ± 0.25)
1.870 ± 0.010
(47.50 ± 0.25)
0.945 ± 0.010
(24.00 ± 0.25)
1.418 ± 0.010
(36.00 ± 0.25)
0.052 ± 0.010
(1.32 ± 0.25)
1.400 ± 0.010
(35.60 ± 0.25)
1.299 ± 0.010
(33.00 ± 0.25)
0.810 ± 0.010
(20.60 ± 0.25)
0.400 ± 0.010
(10.16 ± 0.25)
0.300 ± 0.010
(7.62 ± 0.25)
ICON
AREA
B/R
ICON
AREA
T/L
Bottom/Right
Actuated
Center
Top/Left
Actuated
R0.060 ± 0.010
(R1.52 ± 0.25)
0.680 ± 0.010
(17.27 ± 0.25)
0.812 ± 0.010
(20.62 ± 0.25)
0.950 ± 0.010
(24.13 ± 0.25)
1.700 ± 0.010
(43.18 ± 0.25)
1.190 ± 0.010
(30.23 ± 0.25)
1.450 ± 0.010
(36.83 ± 0.25)
1.190
(30.20)
1.450
(36.80)
0.680
(17.30)
0.830
(21.10)
Catalog Number 32-2245
Note: Recommended panel thickness
0.039–0.157 in (1.00–4.00 mm).
Best results obtained between
0.059 and 0.118 in (1.50 and 3.00 mm).
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-39
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Below Panel Rocker
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Below Panel Rocker Switch with Actuator
Panel Actuator (Below Panel Only) Panel Guard (Below Panel Only)
Indicator (Below Panel Only)
ICON
AREA
T/L
ICON
AREA
B/R
0.980 ± 0.010
(25.00 ± 0.25)
1.400 ± 0.010
(35.60 ± 0.25)
Bottom/Right
Actuated
Top/Left Actuated
Center
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)
1.610 ± 0.010
(40.89 ± 0.25)
0.810 ± 0.010
(20.60 ± 0.25)
0.100 ± 0.010
(2.60 ± 0.25)
0.446 ± 0.010
(11.40 ± 0.25)
0.270 ± 0.005
(6.90 ± 0.13)
0.390 ± 0.005
(9.90 ± 0.13)
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)
1.054 ± 0.010
(26.78 ± 0.25)
1.400 ± 0.010
(35.60 ± 0.25)
0.551 ± 0.010
(14.00 ± 0.25)
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)
0.810 ± 0.010
(20.60 ± 0.25)
0.102 ± 0.010
(2.60 ± 0.25)
0.940 ± 0.010
(23.88 ± 0.25)
ICON
AREA
T/L
ICON
AREA
B/R
1.400 ± 0.010
(35.60 ± 0.25)
0.100 ± 0.010
(2.60 ± 0.25)
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)
0.810 ± 0.010
(20.60 ± 0.25)
0.980 ± 0.010
(25.00 ± 0.25)
0.270 ± 0.005
(6.90 ± 0.13)
0.390 ± 0.005
(9.90 ± 0.13)
V11-T2-40 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Accessories
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Gang Mount System
Panel Plug Connector
1.020 ± 0.010
(25.96 ± 0.25)
2.020 ± 0.010
(51.37 ± 0.25)
1.530 ± 0.010
(38.90 ± 0.25)
0.820 ± 0.005
(20.88 ± 0.13)
1.450 ± 0.005
(36.80 ± 0.13)
1.770 ± 0.010
(44.88 ± 0.25)
2.050 ± 0.010
(52.00 ± 0.25)
0.640 ± 0.010
(16.36 ± 0.25)
0.150 ± 0.010
(3.75 ± 0.25)
1.070 ± 0.010
(27.10 ± 0.25)
0.540 ± 0.010
(13.64 ± 0.25)
1.000 ± 0.010
(25.51 ± 0.25)
1.545 ± 0.010
(39.24 ± 0.25)
3.000 ± 0.010
(76.20 ± 0.25)
1.976 ± 0.010
(50.20 ± 0.25)
1.545 ± 0.010
(39.24 ± 0.25)
Panel Opening
for 2-End Bezel
Panel Opening
for 2-End and 1
Center Bezel
2 End Bezels 2 End Bezels and 1 Center Bezel
2-End Bezel 2 Ends and 1 Center Bezel
End Bezel Catalog Number 17-22146
Center Bezel Catalog Number 17-22152
1.730 ± 0.010
(43.95 ± 0.25)
0.100 ± 0.010
(2.55 ± 0.25)
0.980 ± 0.010
(25.00 ± 0.25)
1.400 ± 0.010
(35.56 ± 0.25)
0.810 ± 0.010
(20.57 ± 0.25)
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)
0.660 ± 0.010
(16.80 ± 0.25)
1.310 ± 0.010
(33.40 ± 0.25)
1.240 ± 0.010
(31.50 ± 0.25)
0.330 ± 0.010
(8.40 ± 0.25)
1.020 ± 0.010
(26.00 ± 0.25)
0.580 ± 0.010
(14.75 ± 0.25)
Catalog Number 17-22145 Catalog Number 25-13936
AMP Terminal Catalog Numbers:
927766-3 (14–16 gauge)
927770-3 (18–20 gauge)
AMP Wire Seal Catalog Numbers:
828905-1 (14–16 gauge)
828904-1 (18–20 gauge)
AMP Sealing Plug Catalog Number:
828922-1
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-41
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Rockers
Dual Motion Safety Switches
Dual Motion Safety Switch
Contents
Description Page
Dual Motion Safety Switches
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-42
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-42
Product Description
Eaton's Vehicle Control
business offers these
new dual motion safety
switches to prevent
accidental actuation and
protect operator personnel
and equipment.
These rockers are available in
two standard circuit options:
OFF (locked)—None—ON and
ON (locked)—None—ON. The
locked safety feature
requires
two motions from the
operator to place the actuator
in the unlocked position. In
the locked position, the
operator must apply pressure
on the actuator forward and
an additional force in an
upward motion for the switch
to be moved to the unlocked
position. Once in the
unlocked position, the
switch can easily be moved
back into the locked position.
Application Description
●Farming equipment
●Fire trucks and safety
vehicles
●Lawn and garden
equipment
●Large transportation buses
●Industrial and commercial
equipment
Features and Benefits
Dual motion safety switches
are recommended up to
15A at 28 Vdc. An added
benefit is its IP54 seal level.
They can be used in tough
environments where there
may be exposure to small
dust particles or water
splashing against the
enclosure from any direction.
For available higher ratings
or additional customizable
circuits, please contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
Options
There are many options to
choose when building the
right switch for your
application. Termination
types to choose from include
screw type, solder lug and
0.250-inch spade terminals.
Actuators are available in four
standard colors with an
appealing matte finish.
Choose from black, red,
white or yellow. Eaton also
offers standard and
customizable legend pad
printing options on top of the
actuator. There is even an
option for arrows to be pad
printed on the sides of the
rocker to indicate the correct
forward motion.
For added convenience,
the bezel is designed to
allow an easy snap-in switch
mount into various panel
thicknesses. The actuators
even have ergonomic
grooves to help provide the
operator a firm grip when
moving the actuator.
Standards and
Certifications
●UL/CSA Recognition at
15A, 125 Vac;
10A, 250 Vac;
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
V11-T2-42 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Rockers
Dual Motion Safety Switches
Catalog Number Selection
Available Switch Pad Prints
Prints 2
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Dual Motion Safety Switch
Notes
1Black pad print color for white and yellow rockers. White pad print color for red and black rockers.
2Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for more available pad print options.
Top Pad Print 1
XX = None
AA = PTO
AB = Creeper engage
AC = Retarder
AD = Windrower ON/OFF
AE = Rotary lock pin cylinder
8179K21Z T51 AA A Y
Termination Type
50 = Screw type
51 = Solder lug
52 = Quick connect
(0.250 in spade)
Poles
and Throws Circuit with Rocker In …
Base
Part Number
2PST
2PDT
Position A
OFF (lock)
ON (lock)
Center Position
None
None
Position B
ON
ON
8179K21Z
8179K22Z
Rocker Color
Y =Black
T = Red
M =White
E = Yellow
Icon Orientation
A = Standard
B = 90° clockwise
C = 180° clockwise
D = 270° counterclockwise
X = None
Side Arrow
Pad Prints
X =None
Y = Both sides
Rotary Lock
Pin Cylinder
Windrower
ON/OFF
RetarderCreeper EngagePTO
0.410 ± 0.010
(10.40 ± 0.25)
1
0.825
(20.90)
0.800 ± 0.010
(20.30 ± 0.25)
0.170
(4.32)
0.957
(24.40)
0.648
(16.50)
1.844
(46.8)
A
B
Push rocker in direction of arrow
to actuate from “A” to “B” position.
“A” position = locked,
“B” position = unlocked.
1.155
(29.30)
1.548
(39.30)
0.250 (6.35)
(0.032 [0.80] Thick)
“A” ± 0.03
0.096 (2.40)
0.102
(2.60)
1.427
(36.20)
23
456
123
PAD
PRINT
ICON
0.669
(0.17)
Pad Print Arrows on Side of Rocker
0.276
(0.07) 0.830 (21.10)
0.680 (17.20)
1.190 (30.20) 1.450 (36.80)
Recommended Panel Opening
Thickness 0.040 to 0.140 (1.01 to 3.55)
Best Results Obtained from
0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.17)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-43
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Rockers
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
1500/2500 Series
Contents
Description Page
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
Midsize Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . V11-T2-44
Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-45
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-46
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-46
Product Description
Eaton’s 1500/2500 series
rocker switch offers a
designer touch that will
enhance any product line.
Ideal applications include
appliances, electronic
instrumentation, data
processing, communications
and medical and office
equipment. Custom legends
are available on the switch
actuator and bezel.
Options
High Inrush Option
The 1500H/2500H is
designed to handle high
inrush currents up to
100A peak inrush for
10 milliseconds.
Hi-Lite Rocker with
High Inrush Option
This two-color rocker version
brightly indicates the ON
position. This version spares
the expense of more costly
illuminated switches and is
available with the high inrush
option.
Standards and
Certifications
Note: See Catalog Number
Selection for more detail.
International Approvals
●UL Recognized
●CSA Certified
●ENEC
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
EN
EC
V11-T2-44 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Rockers
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
Midsize Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate
code letters and/or numbers.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Midsize Non-Illuminated
How To Order—Midsize Illuminated
Notes
11500 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3. 2500 Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
2#1500—#1507 switches are supplied in 1500 type base. #2500—#2507 switches are supplied in 2500 type base.
3See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
46V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.
1 5 0 0
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base
Circuit
Number 2
Circuit
Number 3
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN 1
Position
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(4)A 250V
1PST
ON
MOM. ON
ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
1500
1501
1505
1
3
4
1PDT ON
ON
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
1502
1503
5
7
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
1PDT ON OFF ON 1504 6
UL/CSA:
10A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
1PDT MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
ON
1506
1507
9
8
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(4)A 250V
2PST
ON
MOM. ON
ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
2500
2501
2505
10
11
12
2PDT ON
ON
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
2502
2503
13
15
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
2PDT ON OFF ON 2504 14
UL/CSA:
10A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
2PDT MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
ON
2506
2507
17
16
Example:
Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 =Red
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 =White
3 =Red
Note: B style terminal not offered
for 1506 Series.
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs
Legend Type (Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular Legends
table on Page V11-T2-53.
21E0 3 8
2 5 0 0
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base
Circuit
Number
Circuit
Number
3
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN 1
Position
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac,
10A 250 Vac,
10A 28Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC:
10(4)A 250V
1PST ON
MOM. ON
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
1500
1501
18
21
2PST ON
MOM. ON
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
2500
2501
28
30
Example:
Lens/Rocker Color
A = Amber
G = Green
R =Red
W = White (clear)
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Lamp Voltage
0 =No lamp
1 = 125V neon
2 = 250V neon
4 = 6V filament 4
5 =12V filament 4
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs
Legend Type
(Optional)
725 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
G 2 2 E 7 2 5
Base and Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 =Red
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-45
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Rockers
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush Option
How To Order—High Inrush, Non-Illuminated
How To Order—High Inrush Illuminated
Notes
11500 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #2. 1500H Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3.
2500H Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
2High inrush capabilities available only on basic catalog numbers beginning with 1500H.
3See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
4Standard rating only.
56V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.
1 5 0 0 H
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base
Circuit
Number
Circuit
Number
3
UP
Pos.
CENTER
Position
DOWN 1
Position
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac,
10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC:
10(4)A 250V
1PST ON
MOM. ON
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
1500 _
1501 _
1
3
UL/CSA:
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT, 1 hp
125-250Vac;
ENEC:
16(4)A 250V
1PST ON NONE OFF 1500H 21
Example:
Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 =White
3 =Red
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to Base Circuit Number.
Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 =Red
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs 4
Legend Type
(Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
1 2 4 E 0 3 8
Hi-Lite Color
1 =Black
2 =White
4 = Green
5 =Gray
6 =Red
7 = Yellow
1 5 0 0 H
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base
Circuit
Number
Circuit
Number
3
UP
Pos.
CENTER
Position
DOWN 1
Position
UL/CSA:
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT, 1 hp
125-250 Vac;
ENEC:
16(4)A 250V
1PST ON NONE OFF 1500H 1
2PST ON NONE OFF 2500H 10
Example:
Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 =White
3 =Red
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to Base Circuit Number.
Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 =Red
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
Legend Type
(Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
1 2 E 0 3 8
2 5 0 0 H
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base
Circuit
Number
Circuit
Number
3
UP
Pos.
CENTER
Position
DOWN 1
Position
UL/CSA:
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT,
1 hp 125–250 Vac;
ENEC:
16(4)A 250V
1PST ON NONE OFF 1500H 18
2PST ON NONE OFF 2500H 28
Example:
Lens/Rocker Color
A =Amber
G = Green
R =Red
W = White (clear)
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to Base Circuit Number.
Lamp Voltage
0 = No lamp
1 = 125V neon
2 = 250V neon
4 = 6V filament 5
5 = 12V filament 5
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/
0.25 in quick
connect
Legend Type
(Optional)
725 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
G 2 2 E 7 2 5
Base and Bezel
Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 =Red
V11-T2-46 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Rockers
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
Technical Data and Specifications
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1500/1500H Type Base
2500/2500H Type Base
Description Specification Description Specification
Ratings See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-44 and V11-T2-45. Mechanical life 50,000 cycles minimum
Seal level IP40 Insulation resistance 50M ohms minimum
Circuits Dielectric withstand 1000V rms minimum
Standard 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT, maintained and momentary Terminal types
High inrush option 1PST, 2PST, maintained Standard 6.3 mm Tabs/0.250 in Quick Connect
Hi-lite option 1PST, maintained Optional Solder lug
Contact mechanism Termination material
Standard Slow-make/slow-break butt contact Common (center) Copper fine silver-plated
High inrush option Slow-make/slow-break butt contact with mechanical break End Copper
Make—High inrush option 100A peak inrush at 250 Vac for 10 ms for 10,000 cycles minimum Lamp Brass
Break—High inrush option 16A, 250 Vac for 10,000 cycles minimum Mounting See dimensions below
Contact material Silver inlay over copper Operating temperature
range
32° to 185°F (0° to 85°C)
Contact resistance 10M ohms max. at 1A, 4 Vdc
1.248
(31.70)
Max.
Code “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only
0.024 ± 0.004
(0.60 ± 0.10)
Panel Opening
Panel Thickness: 0.031–0.118 (0.75–3.00)
0.756
(19.20)
Nom.
0.595 (15.11)
Max.
Matte Finish Bezel
Matte Finish Rocker
(Non-Illuminated)
Translucent Rocker
(Illuminated)
Hole
Ø0.098 (Ø2.50)
Nom.
Combination
Quick Connect/
Solder Lug
Code “E”
0.249 ± 0.001
(6.325 ± 0.03) Wide
0.032 ± 0.001
(0.815 ± 0.02) Thick
0.287 (7.30)
Max.
1.070
(27.18)
Max.
Hole
Ø0.106 (Ø2.70)
Nom.
0.422 ± 0.003
(10.73 ± 0.08)
0.042 ± 0.002
(2.05 ± 0.05)
0.982 ± 0.010
(24.95 ± 0.30)
0.888 ± 0.002
(22.55 ± 0.05)
0.474 ± 0.002
(12.05 ± 0.05)
0.483 ± 0.003
(12.27 ± 0.07)
1.075 ± 0.004
(27.30 ± 0.10)
0.909 ± 0.017
(23.09 ± 0.44)
0.380 ± 0.002.0.003
(9.62 ± 0.07/0.08) 0.351 ± 0.010/0.011
(8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)
Matte Finish Bezel
Matte Finish Rocker
(Non-Illuminated)
Translucent Rocker
(Illuminated)
Panel Opening
Panel Thickness:
0.030–0.118 (0.75–3.00)
Code “B” Alternative
Solder Lug Only
0.422 ± 0.003
(10.73 ± 0.08)
0.042 ± 0.002
(2.05 ± 0.05)
0.982 ± 0.011
(24.95 ± 0.30)
0.888 ± 0.002
(22.55 ± 0.05)
1.026 ± 0.002
(26.05 ± 0.05)
0.658 ± 0.004
(16.712 ± 0.14)
0.868 ± 0.002
(22.05 ± 0.05)
0.876 ± 0.004
(22.25 ± 0.10)
1.075 ± 0.004
(27.30 ± 0.10)
0.909 ± 0.017
(23.09 ± 0.44)
0.756
(19.20)
Nom.
0.327 (8.31)
Nom.
0.351 ± 0.010/0.011
(8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)
0.024 ± 0.004
(0.60 ± 0.10)
1.248
(31.70)
Max.
0.287 (7.30)
Max.
1.070 (27.18)
Max.
Hole
Ø0.106 (Ø2.70)
Nom.
Hole
Ø0.098 (Ø2.50)
Nom.
1.028 (26.11)
Max.
0.380 ± 0.002/0.003
(9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)
Combination
Quick Connect/
Solder Lug
Code “E”
0.249 ± 0.001
(6.325 ± 0.03) Wide
0.032 ± 0.001
(0.815 ± 0.02) Thick
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-47
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
1600/2600 Series
Contents
Description Page
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
Non-Illuminated Rocker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-48
Illuminated Rocker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-49
Splashguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-50
High Inrush Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-51
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-52
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-52
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-53
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-53
Product Description
Eaton’s 1600/2600 series of
midsize snap-in rocker and
paddle switches have
worldwide approvals at up to
16A, 250 Vac. One switch
can be used for both
domestic and foreign
markets.
Ideal applications include
appliances, electronic
instrumentation, data
processing, communications,
medical equipment, office
equipment and many more.
A wide circuit variety is
offered in a choice of
standard and custom colors
for illuminated and non-
illuminated versions. Custom
legends are available on the
switch lever and bezel. High
inrush and splashguard are
also available.
Options
High Inrush Option
The 1600H/2600H is
designed to handle high
inrush currents up to
100A peak inrush for
10 milliseconds.
Splashguard Option
This version features a
uniquely designed seal that
resists moisture and water,
making it ideally suited for
marine, RV and food
processing applications.
The oversized nylon lever
with smooth, matte finish
features a convenient
thumb depression to
ensure effortless touch
control. Two-pole switches
feature both a thumb
depression and a convex
curve. See Page V11-T2-50.
Standards and
Certifications
Note: See Catalog Number
Selection for more detail.
International Approvals
●UL Recognized
●CSA Certified 1
●ENEC
●RoHS Compliant 2
Notes
1Splashguard option is cRU marked only.
2Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
EN
EC
V11-T2-48 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
Non-Illuminated Rocker
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add
the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Non-Illuminated Rocker
Notes
1Paddles are UL, CSA only.
21600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3.
2600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
3See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
4To order the standard, add a “dash” to the catalog number. Example: 1600–11E.
1 6 0 0
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in … Base Circuit Number
Circuit
Number 3
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN 2
Position
Rocker Paddle 1
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
1PST
ON
MOM. ON
ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
1600
1601
1605
P1600
P1601
P1605
1
3
4
1PDT ON
ON
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
1602
1603
P1602
P1603
5
7
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
1PDT ON OFF ON 1604 P1604 6
UL/CSA:
10A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
1PDT MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
ON
1606
1607
P1606
P1607
9
8
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
2PST
ON
MOM. ON
ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
2600
2601
2605
P2600
P2601
P2605
10
11
12
2PDT ON
ON
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
2602
2603
P2602
P2603
13
15
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
2PDT ON OFF ON 2604 P2604 14
UL/CSA:
10A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
2PDT MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
ON
2606
2607
P2606
P2607
17
16
Example:
Finish 4
Blank = Standard
M = Matte
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs
Legend Type (Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
M 2 1 E 0 3 8
Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 =Red
Rocker/Paddle
Color
1 = Black
2 =White
3 =Red
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-49
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
Illuminated Rocker
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and
add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Illuminated Rocker
Notes
11600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3.
2600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
2#1600—#1609 switches are supplied in 1600 type base.
#1620—#1627 switches are supplied in 2600 type base. (Must have an “X” code.)
#2600—#2605 switches are supplied in 2600 type base.
3See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
4All independent lamps for IP switches to be assembled from terminal positions #24 and #26.
56V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.
1 6 2 1 X
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base
Circuit
Number 2
Circuit
Number 3
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN 1
Position
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
1PST
ON
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
1600
1601
1620X
1621X
1625X
18
21
20
4
4
1PDT ON
ON
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
1622X
1623X
4
4
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
1PDT ON OFF ON 1624X 4
UL/CSA:
10A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
1PDT MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
ON
1626X
1627X
4
4
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
2PST
ON
MOM. ON
ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
2600
2601
2605
28
30
31
—— Indicator — — 1609 32
Example:
Lens/Rocker Color
A = Amber
G =Green
R =Red
W = White (clear)
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Lamp Voltage
0 = No lamp
1 = 125V neon
2 = 250V neon
4 = 6V filament 5
5 = 12V filament 5
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs
Legend Type (Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
W 5 3 E 0 3 8
Base and Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 =White
3 = Red
X = Independent lamp
V11-T2-50 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
Splashguard
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and
add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Splashguard 1
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Splashguard
Notes
1Splashguard is CUR marked, but does not have ENEC approval.
2All circuits also recommended 10A, 28 Vdc.
3See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
B1600
Rating 2
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base
Circuit
Number
Circuit
Number 3
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
16A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1PST NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
MOM. ON
B1600
B1601
1
2
1PDT NONE
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
B1602
B1604
5
6
10A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac 1PDT MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
ON
B1606
B1607
9
8
16A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac 2PST NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
MOM. ON
B2600
B2601
10
11
16A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac 2PDT NONE
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
B2602
B2604
13
14
10A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac 2PDT MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
ON
B2606
B2607
17
16
Example:
Base Color
1 = Black
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 =Red
4 = Green
5 =Gray
12E
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
Single-Pole Two-Pole
17°
Panel Opening Panel Opening
1.000
(25.40)
1.800
(45.72)
Ø 0.560
(14.22) (2)
1.070
(27.18)
0.758 ± 0.005
(19.26 ± 0.14)
0.888 ± 0.001
(22.05 ± 0.05)
0.81 + 0.02/–0.01
(0.032) Thick
0.249
(6.32 + 0.03/–0.02)
Wide
0.424 + 0.003/–0.004
(10.75 + 0.11/–0.10)
0.500
(12.70)
1.026 ± 0.001
(26.05 ± 0.05)
Hole
Ø 0.106 nom.
(2.70)
0.474 ± 0.001
(12.05 ± 0.05)
Hole
Ø 0.106 nom.
(2.70)
0.868 ± 0.001
(22.05 ± 0.05)
Panel
Thickness
0.030–0.118
(0.75–3.00)
Panel
Thickness
0.030–0.118
(0.75–3.00)
0.876 ± 0.003
(22.25 ± 0.10)
1.075 ± 0.003
(27.30 ± 0.10)
1.075 ± 0.003
(27.30 ± 0.10)
0.483 ± 0.002
(12.27 ± 0.007)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-51
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
High Inrush Rockers
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number
and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Non-Illuminated High Inrush Rockers
How To Order—Illuminated High Inrush Rockers
Notes
1UL, CSA: 1 hp at 125V or 250 Vac; 6A, 125 Vac (L) rating; 10A, 14 Vdc.
Marked on request only.
21600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminal #2.
2600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
31620H switch is supplied in 2600H base.
4No code required.
5See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
61620H switch is supplied in 2600H type base. (Must have “X” code.)
71600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminal #3.
1620H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
2600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
86V, 12V, 24V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.
1 6 0 0 H
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base
Circuit
Number
Circuit
Number
5
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN 2
Position
UL/CSA: 1
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT,
1 hp 125–250 Vac;
ENEC:
16(4)A 250V
1PST ON
ON
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
1600H
1620H 3
1
2
2PST ON NONE OFF 2600H 10
Example: M 2 1 E 0 3 8
Finish 4
Blank = Standard
M = Matte
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
Legend Type (Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
Base and
Bezel Color
1 =Black
2 = White
3 =Red
Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 =White
3 =Red
1 6 0 0 H
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base
Circuit
Number
Circuit
Number
5
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN 2
Position
UL/CSA: 1
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT,
1 hp 125–250 Vac;
ENEC:
16(4)A 250V
1PST ON
ON
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
1600H
1620HX 6
18
19
2PST ON NONE OFF 2600H 28
—— Indicator Indicator —1609 32
Example:
Lens/Rocker Color
A =Amber
G = Green
R = Red
W = White (clear)
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Lamp Voltage
0 =No lamp
1 = 125V neon
2 = 250V neon
4 = 6V filament 8
5 =12V filament 8
6 =24V filament 8
Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
Legend Type
(Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.
R 2 1 E 0 3 8
Base and Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 =White
3 =Red
V11-T2-52 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
Technical Data and Specifications
1600/2600—Midsize AC Rated
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1600/1600H Type Base
2600/2600H Type Base
Description Specification Description Specification
Ratings See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-48 to V11-T2-51. Insulation resistance 100M ohms minimum
Circuits Dielectric withstand 1000V rms minimum
Standard 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT maintained and momentary Terminal types
High inrush option 1PST, 2PST maintained Standard 6.3 mm tabs/0.250 in quick connect
Contact mechanism Optional Solder lug
Standard Slow-make/slow-break butt contact Termination material
High inrush option Slow-make/slow-break butt contact with mechanical break Common (center) Copper fine silver-plated
Make—High inrush option 100A, 250 Vac for 10 ms for 10,000 cycles min. End Copper
Break—High inrush option 16A, 250 Vac for 10,000 cycles min. Lamp Brass
Contact material Silver inlay over copper Mounting See dimensions below
Contact resistance 10M ohms max. at 1A, 4 Vdc Operating temperature range 32° to 185°F (0° to 85°C)
Mechanical life 50,000 cycles minimum
0.024 ± 0.004
(0.60 ± 0.10)
0.287 (7.30)
Max.
Combination Quick
Connect/Solder Lug
Code “E”
0.249 ± 0.001
(6.33 ± 0.03) Wide
0.032 ± 0.001
(0.82 ± 0.02) Thick
0.982 ± 0.010
(24.95 ± 0.30)
0.042 ± 0.002
(2.05 ± 0.05)
0.422 ± 0.004
(10.73 ± 0.08)
0.279 ± 0.004
(7.10 ± 0.10)
0.909 ± 0.017
(23.09 ± 0.44)
0.351 ± 0.010/0.11
(8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)
0.756 (19.20) Nom.
Code “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only
0.380 ± 0.002/0.003
(9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)
1.070
(27.18)
Max.
0.483 ± 0.003
(12.27 ± 0.07)
0.888 ± 0.002
(22.55 ± 0.05)
1.075 ± 0.004
(27.30 ± 0.10)
0.474 ± 0.002
(12.05 ± 0.05)
Hole
Ø0.106 (Ø2.70) Nom.
Panel Thickness
0.030–0.118
(0.75–3.00)
Panel Opening
36°
18°
Hole
Ø0.098 (Ø2.50) Nom.
1.197 (30.40)
Max.
Hole
Ø0.098 (Ø2.50) Nom.
0.024 ± 0.004
(0.60 ± 0.10)
1.023 ± 0.004
(26.00 ± 0.10)
Combination Quick
Connect/Solder Lug
Code “E”
0.249 ± 0.001
(6.33 ± 0.03) Wide
(0.032 ± 0.001
(0.82 ± 0.02) Thick
0.982 ± 0.010
(24.95 ± 0.30)
0.042 ± 0.002
(2.05 ± 0.05)
0.622 ± 0.007
(15.80 ± 0.20)
1.082 ± 0.004
(26.10 ± 0.10)
Hole
Ø0.106 (Ø2.70) Nom.
0.636 ± 0.030
(16.17 ± 0.755)
0.866 + 0.004/–0.008
(22.00 + 0.10/–0.20)
0.327 (8.31)
Nom.
Panel Thickness
0.030–0.118
(0.75–3.00)
Panel OpeningCode “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only
0.422 ± 0.004
(10.73 ± 0.08)
0.888 ± 0.002
(22.55 ± 0.05)
1.075 ± 0.004
(27.30 ± 0.10)
0.909 ± 0.017
(23.09 ± 0.44)
0.279 ± 0.004 (7.10 ± 0.10)
1.070 (27.18) Max.
0.756 (19.20)
Nom.
0.351 ± 0.010/0.11
(8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)
0.380 ± 0.002/0.003
(9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)
0.876 ± 0.004
(22.25 ± 0.10)
0.287 (7.30)
Max.
36˚
18˚
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-53
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
Accessories
Panel Cutout Fillers
If panel cutout fillers are
required in anticipation of
future rocker or paddle
switch installation, order
Catalog Number 1609DUM.
Specify color of base and filler
portion by using the standard
two-digit color code (base
and lever) for non-illuminated
switches.
Example: 1609DUM11
Legends
How To Order—Legends
To order a rocker with a legend marking, add the three-character code to the end of the
catalog number. Example: 1500-21E becomes 1500-21E038.
Legends are for 1500/2500 and 1600/2600 only.
Most Popular Legends 1
Note
1For additional legend options, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
Legend Code Legend Code Legend Code Legend Code
014 653 714 735
023 656 725 746
038 657 730 752
039 671 734 760
630
I
0
O
F
F
O
N
I
0
0
P
O
W
E
R
I
0
O
F
F
O
N
I
0
O
F
F
O
N
0
V11-T2-54 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Rockette Series
Contents
Description Page
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Standard Rockette Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-55
Sealed Rockette Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-56
8058 Series Sealed Rockette Switches. . . . . . . V11-T2-57
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-58
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-58
Product Description
These rocker switches offer
the widest selection of
features available, providing
the design flexibility needed
to fill the requirements of a
variety of applications. They
are available in two versions:
standard and sealed.
The Sealed Rockette features
a silicone rubber seal that
protects contacts and
mechanisms. All switches
resist contaminants such as
sand, dust and moisture with
both a base-to-frame seal
and an actuator seal. Non-
illuminated and illuminated
versions are available. For
Sealed Rockette selection,
see table on Page V11-T2-56.
Features and Benefits
●Volt ages
●110 Vac neon
●14 Vdc and 28 Vdc
On the illuminated version,
the lamp is wired to operate
in conjunction with the
switch on single-throw
circuit; on double-throw
circuits, the lamp is
independent of the switch
●Mounting
Flush (two screws), sub-panel
and snap-in mounting
●Snap-in Mounting
Convenient front panel
or sub-panel snap-in
mounting
Available in single- and two-
pole non-illuminated or in
single-pole
illuminated
Rockette switches.
Contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative for three- and
four-pole circuits
Unless otherwise noted,
all switches with snap-in
mounting are UL Recognized
and CSA Certified
Options
Standard and Sealed
●Additional colors of rockers
and bezels are available
●Hot stamped or pad
printed legends on rocker
and bezel
●Paddle actuators
●Single rocker operator on
two- and three-pole circuits
●Dry circuits capabilities
●Special ratings
●Reversing jumpers
●Dead back cover (two-pole
base) with wire leads
●Special circuits
●Printed circuit terminals
and other terminal types
●Metal snap-in bezels
●Foam dust seal
Sealed Only
●Special voltage bulbs
●Industry standard
connector available
●Two-pole illuminated circuit
Standards and
Certifications
●UL Recognized
●CSA Certified
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-55
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Standard Rockette Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Standard Rockette Switches
Notes
1These switches also have marked rating of 7A at 277 Vac and 3/4 hp at 277 Vac.
2Add code letters and numbers for mounting frame, rocker style and color and terminal construction.
3Also rated 2A, 277 Vac; 2.5A, L125 Vac.
4See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
5See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-59.
6See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-61.
7Cannot be used with snap-in mounting bezel.
8Recommended for use with snap-in mounting.
Rocker/Paddle Style 6
All Except
8130K20, 8140K20,
8140K21, 8140K22
6 = 2-pole
7 = 2-pole
20 = 2-pole 7
37 = 2-pole 8
8130K20, 8140K20,
8140K21, 8140K22
14 = 4-pole
8 1 3 2 K 2 1
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base
Circuit
Number 2
Circuit
Number 4
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
2PST ON NONE OFF 8132K21 3C
2PDT
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
8132K20 3
8132K22 3
8138K20
8138K30
D
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
2PST ON
MOM. ON
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
8142K21
8147K21 C
2PDT
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
8142K20
8142K22
8148K20
8148K30
D
1000W, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac 2PST ON NONE OFF 8150K21 C
20A, 250 Vac
2PST ON NONE OFF 8155K21 C
2PDT ON
ON
OFF
NONE
ON
ON
8155K20
8155K22 D
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac 4PDT ON OFF ON 8130K20 3F
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac 1
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
4PST ON NONE OFF 8140K21 E
4PDT ON
ON
OFF
NONE
ON
ON
8140K20
8140K22 F
Example:
Mounting Frame 5
All Except
8130K20, 8140K20,
8140K21, 8140K22
E = Mounting, 2-pole
F = Mounting, 2-pole
G = Mounting, 2-pole
W = Snap-in
X = Snap-in
Y = Snap-in
Z = Snap-in
8130K20, 8140K20,
8140K21, 8140K22
H = Mounting, 4-pole
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Terminal Type
50 = Screw
51 = Solder lugs
52 = 0.250 in spade
E6T5 0
Rocker/Paddle Color
M =White
T = Red
V =Black
V11-T2-56 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Sealed Rockette Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and
add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Sealed Rockette Switches, Non-Illuminated
How To Order—Sealed Rockette Switches, Illuminated
Notes
1See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
2See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-59.
3See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-61.
Rocker Style 3
1 = Two-face serrated
2 = Three-face smooth
7 = Concave
8 0 5 5 K 2 3
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in … Base Circuit Number
Circuit
Number
1
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
Terminal Type
0.250 in
Spade
Solder
Lugs Screw
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1PST ON NONE OFF 8055K23 8055K24 8055K25 A
1PDT
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
8055K20
8055K26
8055K29
8055K32
8055K21
8055K27
8055K30
8055K33
8055K22
8055K28
8055K31
8055K34
B
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
2PST ON NONE OFF 8055K43 8055K44 8055K45 C
2PDT
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
8055K40
8055K46
8055K49
8055K52
8055K41
8055K47
8055K50
8055K53
8055K42
8055K48
8055K51
8055K54
D
Example:
Mounting Frame 2
E = Standard
F = Standard
L = Standard
X = Snap-in
W = Snap-in
Z = Snap-in
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
E 2 V
Rocker Color
M =White
V = Black
Rocker Color
M =White
V = Black
Rocker Style 3
3 = Serrated w/1 lens
5 = Smooth w/1 lens
8 = Concave w/1 lens
8 0 5 7 K 2 3
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in … Base Circuit Number
Circuit
Number
1
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
Terminal Type
0.250 in
Spade
Solder
Lugs Screw
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1PST ON NONE OFF 8057K23 8057K24 8057K25 G
1PDT MOM. ON OFF ON 8057K29 8057K30 8057K31 H
Example:
Mounting Frame 2
E = Standard
F = Standard
L = Standard
X = Snap-in
W = Snap-in
Z = Snap-in
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Lens Color
1 = Clear
2 =Red
4 =Amber
5 = Blue
E 1 5 V 1
Bulb Voltage
1 = Neon 110V
3 = 14 Vdc filament
4 = 28 Vdc filament
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-57
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
8058 Series Sealed Rockette Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number
and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Sealed Rockette Switches, Non-Illuminated
Notes
1Supplied with terminal screws, (Cat. No. 11-8616), unassembled.
2See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
3See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-59.
4See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-61.
Rocker Style 4
1 = Two-face serrated
2 = Three-face smooth
7 = Concave
8 0 5 8 K 2 8
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in … Base Circuit Number
Circuit
Number
2
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
Terminal Type
0.250 in
Spade
Solder
Lugs
Screw
1
30A, 125 Vac
25A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 125 Vac
2 hp, 250 Vac
1PST ON NONE OFF N/A N/A 8058K10 A
1PDT ON OFF ON N/A N/A 8058K22 B
1PDT ON NONE ON N/A N/A 8058K28 B
1PDT MOM ON OFF ON N/A N/A 8058K31 B
1PDT MOM ON OFF MOM ON N/A N/A 8058K34 B
Example:
Mounting Frame 3
E = Standard ears up with two
tapped holes
F = Standard flat with two holes
X = Metal snap-in
Z = Standard plastic snap-in
W = Contour plastic snap-in
L = Standard ears up with
two holes
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Z 7 V
Rocker Color
M =White
T =Red
V = Black
8058K22E7V 8058K10X7T 8058K28Z7V
V11-T2-58 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Technical Data and Specifications
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Dimensions
Base Standard Rockette Switch Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Te rm i n a l s
Snap-In Mounting Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Ty p e W Ty p e X
Ty p e Y Ty p e Z
Description Specification
Ratings and
circuits
See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-55 to V11-T2-57.
Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc.
Contact
mechanism
Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism.
Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use
on AC and low voltage DC applications
Contact material
3–6A rated Movable—Silver-plated copper
Stationary—Silver-plated copper
10–15A rated Movable—Silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact
face button
Stationary—Copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
20A rated Movable—Silver-plated copper with cad-oxide contact
face button
Stationary—Copper with cad-oxide contact face button
Description Specification
1000W rated Movable—Checon SK015B contact material welded to contactor
Stationary—Copper with cad-oxide contact face button
Terminal types Screw terminals—Brass designed to accept #6-32 x 3/16 binding head
screws (Cat. No. 811-2), furnished unassembled
Solder lug—0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade
Termination
material
Screw and spade—Brass
Solder— Tintillate-plated brass
Lamp voltages 110 Vac neon
14 Vdc and 28 Vdc
Mounting Flush (two screws), sub-panel and snap-in mounting
0.125
(3.18)
Dia. Hole
0.188
(4.78)
Solder Lug Terminal
Hot Tin Dipped
Screw Terminal
0.040
(1.02)
#6-32 x 0.188 (4.78)
Lg. Binding Head
Term. Screw
0.288
(7.32)
0.040
(1.02)
2.06
(52.32)
1.12
(28.44)
1.550 ± 0.010
(39.37 ± 0.254)
0.900 ± 0.010
(22.86 ± 0.254)
Contoured Snap-In
Bezel, Two-Pole Base
Snap-In Bezel, Single-, Two-
and Four-Pole Bases
1.94
(49.27)
1.700
(43.18)
0.960
(24.38)
Sub-Panel Snap-In Mounting Bezel,
Single- and Two-Pole Bases
Snap-In Mounting Bezel,
Two-Pole Base Only
125°C
Approx.
0.680 (17.27)
1.450
(36.83)
1.190
(30.23)
0.830
(21.08)
Panel Thickness
0.040–0.140 (1.02–3.56)
Panel Opening
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-59
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Frame Types and Rocker/Paddle Styles for Standing Switches—Non-Illuminated Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Two-Pole Mounting Frame Types
Two-Pole Rocker Styles
Four-Pole Mounting Frame Type Four-Pole Rocker Styles
Reference Dimension “CC”—Top of Frame to Bottom of Terminal
Rocker
Style
Dimension in Inches (mm)
Rocker
Style
Dimension in Inches (mm)
Mounting Frame Type Mounting Frame Type
Two-Pole Four-Pole
Type E Type F Type G
Recommended
Panel Opening Type H
Recommended
Panel Opening
6 0.08 (2.03) 0.42 (10.67) 0.42 (10.67) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75) 14 0.08 (2.03) 1.34 x 1.25 (34.04 x 31.75)
7 0.08 (2.03) 0.42 (10.67) 0.42 (10.67) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)
20 N/A 0.42 (10.67) 0.42 (10.67) N/A
37 N/A N/A N/A N/A
1.940 (49.28)
0.380
(9.65)
CC
1.620
(41.15)
#6-32 Tap 2 Holes
2.500 (63.50)
0.380
(9.65)
CC
2.250
(57.15)
0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes
2.120 (53.85)
0.380
(9.65)
CC
1.750
(44.45)
0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes
17.5° 0.200 (5.08)
0.100 (2.54)
0.380 ± 0.030
(9.65 ± 0.76)
0.850 ± 0.030
(21.59 ± 0.76)
0.640 ± 0.254
(16.26 ± 6.45)
Mounting Type
Recommended with This Style
Type E Type F Style 37 with Type X
Ty p e G
0.650
(16.51)
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
CC
0.650
(16.51)
CC
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
0.880
(22.35)
0.660
(16.76)
17.5°
0.100
(2.54)
0.830
(21.08)
R 0.100
(R 2.54)
CC
Style 6 Style 7 Style 20
1.940 (49.28)
0.580
(14.73)
CC
1.620
(41.15)
#6-32
Tap 2 Holes
R 0.610
(R 15.49)
1.300
(33.02) CC
Ty p e H S t y l e 1 4
V11-T2-60 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Base Sealed Rockette Switch Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Sealed Two-Pole—Mounting Frame Type E—Rocker Style 1 Terminals
Sealed Two-Pole—Mounting Frame Type F—Rocker Style 1 Panel Opening
Snap-in Mounting Frame Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Sealed Two-Pole Switch—Mounting Frame Type W—Rocker Stye 7 Terminals
0.094 (2.39)
Max.
0.812
(20.62)
0.062
(1.57)
0.032
(0.81)
1.330
(33.83)
0.250 (6.35)
17.5˚
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
0.648 (16.46)
0.750
(19.05)
6-32 Tap
1.620 (41.15)
1.940 (49.28)
0.031 (0.79) Ref.
0.380 (9.65)
0.380 (9.65)
Quick
Connect
Term.
0.080
(2.03)
BB
AA
0.188
(4.78) 0.040
(1.02)
#6-32 x 0.188 (4.78) Lg.
Binding Head
Term. Screws
Solder Lug Terminal
Hot Tin Dipped
Screw Terminal
0.288
(7.32)
0.040
(1.02)
0.125 (3.18)
Dia. Hole
0.094
(2.39)
Max.
0.812
(20.62)
0.062
(1.57)
0.032
(0.81) Ref. 1.330 (33.83)
0.250
(6.35)
17.5˚
R 0.610
(R 15.49) 0.648
(16.48)
0.750
(19.05)
2 Mtg. Holes
0.172 (4.37) Dia.
2.250 (57.15)
2.500 (63.50)
35˚
0.453
(11.51)
0.294
(7.47)
0.031/0.033
(0.79/0.84)
0.032
(0.81)
BB
AA
R 1.135
(R 28.83)
0.722
(18.34)
1.450
(36.83)
1.190
(30.23)
125°C
Approx.
0.830
(21.80)
0.680
(17.27)
Panel Thickness
0.040–0.140 (1.02–3.56)
0.125 (3.18)
Dia. Hole
0.188
(4.78)
0.040
(1.02)
#6-32 x 0.188 (4.78) Lg.
Binding Head
Term. Screws
Solder Lug Terminal
Hot Tin Dipped
Screw Terminal
0.288
(7.32)
0.040
(1.02)
0.280
(7.11)
0.390
(9.91)
0.960
(24.38)
1.620 (41.15)
0.250
(6.35)
0.648
(16.46)
0.750
(19.05)
2.020 (51.31)
1.090
(27.69)
35˚
0.126
(3.20)
0.031 (0.79) Ref.
0.031
(0.79)
BB
AA
1.062 (26.97)
0.260 (6.60)
1.550 ± 0.010
(39.37 ± 0.254)
0.900 ± 0.010
(22.86 ± 0.254)
Snap-In Bezel
1.700
(43.18)
0.960
(24.38)
Snap-In Mounting Bezel
Type X Type Z Reference Dimensions “AA” and “BB” in Inches (mm) 1
Notes
1Dimension “AA”—Top of frame to bottom of terminal; “BB”—from bottom of base to bottom of terminal.
2#8-32 x 1/4 Phillips screw.
Terminal
Type
Dimension “AA” (Two-Pole) Dimension “BB”
E Frame F Frame L Frame W Frame X Frame Z Frame All Frames
Screw 1.39 (35.33) 1.05 (26.62) 1.39 (35.33) 1.37 (34.82) 1.39 (35.34) 1.37 (34.82) 0.30 (7.62)
Solder lug 1.36 (34.57) 1.02 (25.86) 1.36 (34.57) 1.34 (34.06) 1.36 (34.51) 1.34 (34.06) 0.27 (6.86)
0.250 in spade 1.53 (38.89) 1.19 (30.18) 1.53 (38.89) 1.51 (38.38) 1.53 (38.89) 1.51 (38.38) 0.44 (11.18)
8058 Screw 21.509 (38.33) 1.145 (29.08) 1.509 (38.33) 1.808 (45.92) 1.627 (41.33) 1.528 (38.81) 0.460 (11.68)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-61
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Dimensions for Frame Type and Rocker Styles—Sealed Switches
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Non-Illuminated
Single- and Two-Pole Mounting Frame Types
Single- and Two-Pole Rocker Styles
Illuminated
Single-Pole Mounting Frame Types
Single-Pole Rocker Styles
Reference Dimension “CC”—Top of Frame to Rocker Face
0.380
(9.65) CC
1.620
(41.15)
#6-32 Tap 2 Holes
1.940 (49.28)
0.380
(9.65)
0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes
CC
2.500 (63.50)
2.250 (57.15)
0.162 (4.11) Dia. 2 Hole
1.940 (49.28)
0.380 (9.65)
1.620 (41.15) CC
Type E
Type F
Type L
0.650
(16.51) CC
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
0.650
(16.51) CC
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
R 1.135 (R 28.83)
R 0.610
(R 15.49) CC
0.650
(16.51)
Style 1
Style 2
Style 7
0.380
(9.65) CC
1.620
(41.15)
#6-32 Tap 2 Holes
1.940 (49.28)
0.380
(9.65)
0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes
CC
2.500 (63.50)
2.250 (57.15)
0.162 (4.11) Dia. 2 Hole
1.940 (49.28)
0.380 (9.65)
1.620
(41.15) CC
Type E
Type F
Type L
0.650
(16.51)
0.360
(9.14)
0.216
(5.49)
CC
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
0.650
(16.51)
0.360
(9.14)
0.216
(5.49)
R 0.610 (R 15.49)
CC
0.650
(16.51)
0.496
(12.60)
0.350
(8.89)
CC
R 1.135 (R 28.83)
R 0.610
(R 15.49)
Style 3
Style 5
Style 8
Rocker
Style
Dimension in Inches (mm)
Rocker
Style
Dimension in Inches (mm)
Mounting Frame Type Mounting Frame Type
Single- and Two-Pole (Non-Illuminated) Single- and Two-Pole (Illuminated)
E Frame F Frame L Frame Recommended Panel Opening E Frame F Frame L Frame Recommended Panel Opening
1 0.08 (2.03) 0.42 (10.67) 0.08 (2.03) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75) 3 0.08 (2.03) 0.42 (10.67) 0.08 (2.03) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)
2 0.08 (2.03) 0.42 (10.67) 0.08 (2.03) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75) 5 0.08 (2.03) 0.42 (10.67) 0.08 (2.03) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)
7 0.11 (2.79) 0.45 (11.43) 0.11 (2.79) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75) 8 0.11 (2.79) 0.45 (11.43) 0.11 (2.79) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)
V11-T2-62 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.8
Rockers
8006/8007—EURO SR
8006/8007 Series
Contents
Description Page
8006/8007—EURO SR
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-63
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-64
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-64
Product Description
Field-proven in America’s
roughest off-road
applications, the standard
size EURO SR is one tough
and reliable rocker switch.
Available with the complete
range of rugged single- and
two-pole, illuminated or
non-illuminated circuits.
The EURO SR Series offers
snap-in mounting and can be
provided with a durable
silicone seal that resists dust
and moisture.
All EURO SR switches are
molded in an aesthetically
pleasing matte finish and
operate with a crisp tactile
feel, allowing for easy
actuation.
The EURO SR will accept
loads up to 15A. Terminal
numbers are stamped on
base for easy identification.
Features and Benefits
●Contact Mechanism
Slow-make/slow-break
contact mechanism. Butt
action contact mechanism
designed specifically for use
on AC and low voltage DC
applications.
●Rocker Material
Thermoplastic rocker
actuators. Different colors are
available. Rocker and bezel
are a high-grade nylon
supplied with matte finish.
●Lamps
Five lamp voltages—14 Vdc,
18 Vdc, 28 Vdc, 125 Vac neon
and 250 Vac neon—are
offered as standard. For
additional lamp voltages,
please contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
●Mounting Means
Snap-in mounting with plastic
bezel.
●Seal
Available in sealed and non-
sealed versions. Sealed
devices are furnished with
silicone rubber seal, providing
moisture and dust resistance
with an IP67 rating.
Options
●Additional colors of rockers
and bezels are available
●Special circuits
●Special ratings
●Pad-printed legends on
rocker and bezel
●Special voltage bulbs
●Dry circuit capabilities
●Foam dust seal
●Reversing jumpers
●Printed circuit terminals
and other terminal types
●Wire leads
●Dead back cover
●Palm guard
●Industry standard
connector: 28-3426
●EURO SR panel plug:
53-3318
For information on optional
features, contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
Lens Options
●Lens Part Numbers
(if ordered separately)
Green . . . . . . . . . . 28-5415
Amber . . . . . . . .28-5415-2
Red. . . . . . . . . . .28-5415-3
Blue . . . . . . . . . .28-5415-4
White . . . . . . . . .28-5415-5
Standards and
Certifications
●UL Recognized and
recognized component
for Canada File E2702
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-63
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.8
Rockers
8006/8007—EURO SR
EURO SR Standard Size Euro-Style Rocker Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—EURO SR, Non-Illuminated
How To Order—EURO SR, Illuminated
Notes
1Momentary contact.
23A at 250 Vac, 6A at 125 Vac.
31/4 hp at 125–250 Vac.
4All double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT, provided with two lamps and two lenses (Rocker Style 4). When lamp is wired independent of circuit for 1PDT switches, device is supplied with lamp
centered in open-pole of base.
5Not standard with lamp wired independent of circuit. All 2PDT switches must be dependent on circuit and use Rocker Style 4.
6Not provided standard for double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT. Must use Rocker Style 4 for all double-throw switches.
7Available on single-pole versions only.
814 Vdc, 18 Vdc and 28 Vdc bulbs are not UL, CSA when bulb is wired dependent to switch circuit.
Rocker Style
1 = Two-face
8 0 0 6 K 2 3
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in … Terminal Type
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position 0.250 in
Spade
Solder
Lugs Screw
10A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc
1PST 2-3
2-3 1
NONE OFF 8006K23
8006K35
8006K24
8006K36
8006K25
8006K37
1PDT
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
8006K20
8006K26
8006K29
8006K32
8006K21
8006K27
8006K30
8006K33
8006K22
8006K28
8006K31
8006K34
2PST 2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
NONE OFF 8006K43
8006K55
8006K44
8006K56
8006K45
8006K57
2PDT
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4 1
8006K40
8006K46
8006K49
8006K52
8006K41
8006K47
8006K50
8006K53
8006K42
8006K48
8006K51
8006K54
2PDT 22-3, 5-6 5-6 OFF 8006K58 8006K59 8006K60
2PDT 35-6 5-3 5-1 8006K61 8006K62 8006K63
Example:
Mounting Frame
Color /Style
N = Black/standard
T = Black/top half
palm guard
B = Black/bottom half
palm guard
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Seal Option
1 = Non-sealed
2 = Sealed
N 1 T 1
Rocker Color
M =White
T = Red
V =Black
Rocker Style
3 = Two-face
w/1 lens 6
4 =
Two-face
w/2 lenses
4
8 0 0 7 K 2 3
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in … Terminal Type
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position 0.250 in
Spade
Solder
Lugs Screw
10A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc
1PST OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
2-1
2-11
8007K23
8007K35
8007K24
8007K36
8007K25
8007K37
1PDT 4
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
8007K20
8007K26
8007K29
8007K32
8007K21
8007K27
8007K30
8007K33
8007K22
8007K28
8007K31
8007K34
2PST OFF
2-3, 5-6 1
NONE
OFF
2-1, 5-4
NONE
8007K43
8007K55
8007K44
8007K56
8007K45
8007K57
2PDT
45
2-3, 5-6
2-1, 5-4
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
2-1, 5-4
2-3, 5-6
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4 1
8007K40
8007K46
8007K49
8007K52
8007K41
8007K47
8007K50
8007K53
8007K42
8007K48
8007K51
8007K54
Example:
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Seal Option
1 = Non-sealed
2 = Sealed
N 4 1 3 T 2 1
Rocker Color
M =White
T = Red
V = Black
Bulb Voltage
1 = 125V neon 7
2 = 250V neon 7
3 = 14 Vdc 8
4 = 28 Vdc 8
7 = 18 Vdc 8
Lamp Wiring
1 = Dependent
2
= Independent
Lens Color
1 =White
2 = Red
3 = Green
4 =Amber
5 = No lens
6 =Blue
7 = Clear
Mounting Frame
Color /Style
N = Black/standard
T = Black/top half
palm guard
B = Black/bottom
half palm
guard
V11-T2-64 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.8
Rockers
8006/8007—EURO SR
Technical Data and Specifications
8006/8007—EURO SR
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Non-Illuminated Illuminated
Palm Guard
Description Specification
Ratings 15A at 125 Vac
10A at 250 Vac
3/4 hp at 250 Vac
(hp rating does not apply to lighted switches)
Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
Circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT
Maintained and momentary action
Mechanical life Maintained—100,000 operations, minimum
Momentary—25,000 operations, minimum
Electrical life 25,000 operations minimum at full load
Terminal types Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm)
Spade—Brass
Screw—Brass (terminal screws provided unassembled)
Solder—Tintillate-plated brass
Base material Thermoset molding material
Rocker material Thermoplastic rocker actuators
Dielectric 1000V rms, minimum
Seal level IP67 (with optional seal)
Mounting means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel
Operating temperature –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness:
0.040 to 0.140 (1.02 to 3.56)
Best Results Obtained from:
0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.18)
0.680 (17.27)
0.830
(21.08)
1.450
(36.85)
1.190
(30.23)
R 0.156 ± 0.010
(R 3.96 ± 0.25)
1.705 ± 0.011
(43.31 ± 0.31)
0.957 ± 0.012
(24.31 ± 0.30)
0.250 ± 0.004
(6.35 ± 0.08)
0.030 (0.813) Thick
0.440 ± 0.005
(11.18 ± 0.13)
0.389 ± 0.041
(9.88 ± 1.06)
0.096 ± 0.010
(2.44 ± 0.25)
1.082 ± 0.012
(27.48 ± 0.30)
1.427 + 0.020/– 0.012
(36.25 + 0.51/– 0.38)
0.820 ± 0.005
(20.83 ± 0.13)
123
456
R 0.156 ± 0.010
(R 3.96 ± 0.25)
1.705 ± 0.011
(43.31 ± 0.31)
0.957 ± 0.012
(24.31 ± 0.30)
1.705 ±0.012
(43.31 ±0.30)
R 0.156 ±0.005
(3.97 ±0.13)
1.220 ±0.012
(30.99 ±0.30)
0.389 ±0.040
(9.88 ±1.02)
0.096 ±0.010
(2.44 ±0.25)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-65
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.9
Rockers
8004/8005—Euro Full Size
8004/8005–Euro Full Size
Contents
Description Page
8004/8005—Euro Full Size
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-66
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-67
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-67
Product Description
Eaton’s 8004 and 8005 Euro-
Look Series features matte
finish European styling and
snap-in mounting. These
durable switches, field-tested
in the most demanding truck
and marine applications, are
available with a variety of
standard actuator options.
Options include concave,
two-face, illuminated, non-
illuminated and the recessed
feature, which allows
placement of your label on
the face of our rocker. All
switches in this rugged lineup
can be fitted with a silicone
rubber seal to provide
moisture and dust-resistance.
Additionally, these switches
can be gang-mounted into a
single panel opening. Panel
blanks are also available.
Features and Benefits
●Contact Mechanism
Slow-make/slow-break
contact mechanism. Butt
action contact mechanism
designed specifically for use
on AC and low voltage DC
applications.
●Rocker Material
Custom styled, multi-colored
thermoplastic rocker
actuators. The rocker and
bezel are supplied with a
matte finish.
●Lamps
Five lamp voltages—14 Vdc,
18 Vdc, 28 Vdc, 125 Vac neon
and 250 Vac neon—are
offered as standard. For
additional lamp voltages,
please contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
●Mounting Means
Snap-in mounting with plastic
bezel.
●Seal
Available in sealed and non-
sealed versions. Sealed
devices are furnished with a
silicone rubber seal providing
moisture and dust resistance
with an IP54 rating.
Options
●Additional colors of rockers
and mounting bezels are
available
●Special circuits
●Special ratings
●Gold contacts
●Dry circuit capabilities
●Pad-printed legends on
rocker and bezel
●Special lamp voltages
●Foam dust seal
●Reversing jumpers
●Printed circuit terminals
and other terminal types
●Dead back cover (two-pole
base) with wire leads
●Matching indicators
●Industry standard
connector: 28-3426
●Full size Euro-Look gang
mounting systems
●Full size Euro-Look panel
plugs: 17-19544-2
For information on optional
features, contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
Lens Options
●Lens Part Numbers
(if ordered separately)
8005 Two-Face
Green . . . . . . . . . 28-3425
Amber . . . . . . . . 28-3425-2
Red . . . . . . . . . . 28-3425-3
Blue . . . . . . . . . . 28-3425-4
White . . . . . . . . 28-3425-5
8005 Concave
Red . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5148
Green . . . . . . . . 28-5148-2
Amber . . . . . . . . 28-5148-3
Blue . . . . . . . . . . 28-5148-4
Clear . . . . . . . . . 28-5148-5
Standards and
Certifications
●UL Recognized and
recognized component
for Canada File E2702
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
V11-T2-66 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.9
Rockers
8004/8005—Euro Full Size
Full Size, Euro-Look Rocker Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Full Size Euro, Non-Illuminated
How To Order—Full Size Euro, Illuminated
Notes
1Momentary contact.
23A at 250 Vac, 5A at 125 Vac.
31/4 hp at 125–250 Vac.
4All double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT, provided with two lamps and two lenses (Rocker Style 4). When lamp is wired independent of circuit for 1PDT switches, device is supplied with lamp
centered in open-pole of base.
5Not standard available with lamp wired independent of circuit. All 2PDT switches must be dependent on circuit and use Rocker Style 4, 5 or 9.
6Not provided standard for double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT. Must use Rocker Style 4, 5 or 9 for all double-throw switches.
7Available on single-pole versions only.
814 Vdc and 28 Vdc bulbs are not UL, CSA when bulb is wired dependent to switch circuit.
Rocker Style
0 = Recessed
1 = Two-face
6 = Paddle
7 = Concave
8 0 0 4 K 2 3
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in … Terminal Type
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position 0.250 in
Spade
Solder
Lugs Screw
10A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc
1PST 2-3
2-3 1NONE OFF 8004K23
8004K35
8004K24
8004K36
8004K25
8004K37
1PDT
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
8004K20
8004K26
8004K29
8004K32
8004K21
8004K27
8004K30
8004K33
8004K22
8004K28
8004K31
8004K34
2PST 2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1NONE OFF 8004K43
8004K55
8004K44
8004K56
8004K45
8004K57
2PDT
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4 1
8004K40
8004K46
8004K49
8004K52
8004K41
8004K47
8004K50
8004K53
8004K42
8004K48
8004K51
8004K54
2PDT 22-3, 5-6 5-6 OFF 8004K58 8004K59 8004K60
2PDT 35-6 5-3 5-1 8004K61 8004K62 8004K63
Example:
Mounting
Frame Color
N = Black
M =White
T =Red
G =Gray
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Seal Option
1 = Non-sealed
2 = Sealed
N 1 T 1
Rocker Color
M =White
T = Red
V =Black
G =Gray
Rocker Style
2 = Recessed
w/1 lens 6
3 = Two-face
w/1 lens 6
4 =
Two-face
w/2 lenses
4
5 = Recessed
w/2 lenses 4
8 = Concave
w/1 lens 6
9 = Concave
w/2 lenses 4
8 0 0 5 K 2 3
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in … Terminal Type
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position 0.250 in
Spade
Solder
Lugs Screw
10A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc
1PST OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
2-1
2-1 1
8005K23
8005K35
8005K24
8005K36
8005K25
8005K37
1PDT 4
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
8005K20
8005K26
8005K29
8005K32
8005K21
8005K27
8005K30
8005K33
8005K22
8005K28
8005K31
8005K34
2PST OFF
2-3, 5-6 1
NONE
OFF
2-1, 5-4
NONE
8005K43
8005K55
8005K44
8005K56
8005K45
8005K57
2PDT
45
2-3, 5-6
2-1, 5-4
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
2-1, 5-4
2-3, 5-6
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4 1
8005K40
8005K46
8005K49
8005K52
8005K41
8005K47
8005K50
8005K53
8005K42
8005K48
8005K51
8005K54
Example:
Mounting
Frame Color
N = Black
M =White
T =Red
G =Gray
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Seal Option
1 = Non-sealed
2 = Sealed
N 4 1 3 T 2 1
Rocker Color
M =White
T = Red
V = Black
G =Gray
Bulb Voltage
1 = 125V neon 7
2 = 250V neon 7
3 = 14 Vdc 8
4 = 28 Vdc 8
7 = 18 Vdc 8
Lamp Wiring
1 = Dependent
2
= Independent
Lens Color
2 = Red
3 = Green
4 =Amber
5 = No lens
6 =Blue
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-67
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.9
Rockers
8004/8005—Euro Full Size
Technical Data and Specifications
8004/8005—Euro Full Size
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Non-Illuminated Illuminated
Description Specification
Ratings 15A at 125 Vac; 10A at 250 Vac; 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
(hp rating does not apply to lighted switches)
Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
Circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT; Maintained and momentary action
Contact material Movable—Silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Stationary—Copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Mechanical life Maintained—100,000 operations, minimum
Momentary—25,000 operations, minimum
Electrical life 25,000 operations minimum at full load
Terminal types Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade—Brass
Screw—Brass #6-32 x 3/16 (terminal screws provided unassembled)
Solder—Tintillate-plated brass; tintillate spade terminals
Base material Thermoset molding material
Dielectric 1000V rms, minimum
Seal level IP54 (with optional seal)
Mounting means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel
1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.13)
0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)
R 0.004 ± 0.005
(R 0.125 ± 0.13)
0.519 ± 0.005
(13.18 ± 0.13)
1.087 ± 0.005
(27.61 ± 0.13)
Surface Length Along
Bottom of Recess:
1.122 ± 0.012 (28.50 ± 0.31)
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
1.440 ± 0.010
(36.58 ± 0.25)
0.689 ± 0.010
(17.50 ± 0.25)
0.395 ± 0.029
(10.03 ± 0.76)
0.440 ± 0.010
(11.18 ± 0.25)
1.602 ± 0.029
(40.69 ± 0.76)
0.687 ± 0.015
(17.45 ± 0.38)
0.328 ± 0.015
(8.33 ± 0.38)
R 0.156 (R 3.96) Typ.
123
456
0.090 ± 0.005
(2.29 ± 0.13)
0.080 (2.03)
0.031 (0.79)
R 0.060 (R 1.52)
0.250 ± 0.032 (6.35 ± 0.81)
0.001 (0.032) Thick
Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness:
0.030 to 0.190 (0.76 to 4.83)
Best Results Obtained From:
0.080 to 0.130 (2.03 to 3.30)
1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.13)
0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)
R 0.004 ± 0.005
(R 0.125 ± 0.13)
0.519 ± 0.005
(13.18 ± 0.13)
1.087 ± 0.005
(27.61 ± 0.13)
Surface Length Along
Bottom of Recess:
1.122 ± 0.012 (28.50 ± 0.31)
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)
1.440 ± 0.010
(36.58 ± 0.25)
0.689 ± 0.010
(17.50 ± 0.25)
0.395 ± 0.029
(10.03 ± 0.76)
0.440 ± 0.010
(11.18 ± 0.25)
1.602 ± 0.029
(40.69 ± 0.76)
0.687 ± 0.015
(17.45 ± 0.38)
0.328 ± 0.015
(8.33 ± 0.38)
R 0.156 (R 3.96) Typ.
123
456
0.090 ± 0.005
(2.29 ± 0.13)
0.080 (2.03)
0.031 (0.79)
R 0.060 (R 1.52)
0.250 ± 0.032 (6.35 ± 0.81)
0.001 (0.032) Thick
Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness:
0.030 to 0.190 (0.76 to 4.83)
Best Results Obtained From:
0.080 to 0.130 (2.03 to 3.30)
1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
V11-T2-68 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.10
Rockers
X Series Rockers
X Series Rockers—XR
Contents
Description Page
X Series Rockers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-69
X Series Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-70
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-70
Light Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-70
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-71
Product Description
The Electrical Sector is
pleased to offer X Series
Rockers for use in outdoor
applications to meet almost
every market need.
These sleek style rockers
are molded in a unique
smooth matte finish. The
bezel is also unique with
a more modern rounded-
rectangular design with an
oval shaped rocker. X Series
Rockers are available in
single- and double-pole with
various circuit options, LED
illumination, and laser
etching.
●Frames and actuator colors
are black
●Switches provided with
0.025 spade quick connect
terminals
Application Description
Market Applications
●Agriculture
●Bus
●Commercial
●Marine
●Specialty Vehicle
●Tr u ck
Features and Benefits
●Seal
Standard IP56 Sealing per
IES 60529.
●Illumination
Standard LED voltages
offered include 14 Vdc and
125 Vac.
●Material
Frames are nylon and
actuators are nylon with glass
fiber with both meeting UL
flame: 94HB. Terminals are
silver plated brass.
●Mounting Means
Easy snap-in mounting with
plastic bezel.
●Label
Eaton part number etched on
switch for easy inventory
management.
Options
●Panel plug: 53-3318
●Industry standard
connector: 28-3426
●For information on optional
features, contact your
local Eaton Sales
Representative.
Standards and
Certifications
●UL Recognized and
recognized component
for Canada File E2702
●T85
●RoHS Compliant
Product Selection Guide
Seal
Top ✔
Bottom —
Panel —
Actuator
Rocker without bezel —
Rocker with bezel ✔
Paddle —
Snap-in lens —
Locking —
Label —
Decorative
Laser-etch ✔
Pad-print —
Poles
Single ✔
Double ✔
Four —
Termination
Spade ✔
Solder —
Screw —
Weld lugs —
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc — Neon 110V —
Incandescent 12 Vdc — Neon 125V —
Incandescent 14 Vdc — Neon 250V —
Incandescent 18 Vdc — 14 Vdc LED ✔
Incandescent 24 Vdc — 28 Vdc LED —
Incandescent 28 Vdc — 125 Vac LED ✔
277 Vac LED —
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-69
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.10
Rockers
X Series Rockers
X Series Rockers
Catalog Number Selection
Standard rating 16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V
Also recommended for use in applications up to 21A 14 Vdc
IP56 per IES 60529
Product Selection
X Series Rockers
Notes
1 Available in AC applications only.
2 Double-pole not available illuminated; it is available laser etched.
3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-70.
4 See Symbols Library on Page V11-T2-70.
Lamp
Voltage
Switch
Function
Light
Circuit 3
Lens Color
T. 1-4 T. 3-6
Switch
Markings Catalog Number
None SPST OFF-ON X = None None None Int’l ON/OFF 4XRXAXXXNV1CU
SPST OFF-ON X = None None None ON/OFF 4XRXAXXXNV1DB
14 Vdc LED SPST OFF-ON E = None Amber None XR1AEX4NV1XX
SPST OFF-ON E = None Green None XR1AEX3NV1XX
SPST OFF-ON E = None Red None XR1AEX2NV1XX
SPDT ON-ON G = Amber Amber None XR1CG44NV1XX
SPDT ON-ON G = Green Green None XR1CG33NV1XX
SPDT ON-OFF-ON G = Amber Amber None XR1BG44NV1XX
SPDT ON-OFF-ON G = Green Green None XR1BG33NV1XX
SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON) G = Amber Amber None XR1EG44NV1XX
SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON) G = Green Green None XR1EG33NV1XX
None DPST OFF-ON 2X = None None None Int’l ON/OFF 4XRXMXXXNV1CU
DPST OFF-ON 2X = None None None ON/OFF 4XRXMXXXNV1DB
DPST OFF-ON X = None None None None XRXMXXXNV1XX
DPST ON-ON X = None None None None XRXNXXXNV1XX
125 Vac LED 1SPST OFF-ON E = None Amber None XR3AEX4NV1XX
SPST OFF-ON E = None Green None XR3AEX3NV1XX
SPST OFF-ON E = None Red None XR3AEX2NV1XX
SPDT ON-ON G = Amber Amber None XR3CG44NV1XX
SPDT ON-ON G = Green Green None XR3CG33NV1XX
SPDT ON-OFF-ON G = Amber Amber None XR3BG44NV1XX
SPDT ON-OFF-ON G = Green Green None XR3BG33NV1XX
SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON) G = Amber Amber None XR3EG44NV1XX
SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON) G = Green Green None XR3EG33NV1XX
XR Series Rocker
V11-T2-70 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.10
Rockers
X Series Rockers
X Series Symbols Library
Technical Data and Specifications
X Series
Light Diagrams
X Series
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
CU
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
DB
Description Specification
Ratings 16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V;
recommended 21A 14 Vdc or 10A 28 Vdc
Operating temperature –4° to 176°F (–20° to 80°C)
Light Circuit
Letter Functions
Light Circuit
Letter Functions
Light Circuit
Letter Functions
X All E SPST G SPDT
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
Jumpers (3–4)
6
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-71
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.10
Rockers
X Series Rockers
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mounting Hole
X Series
Dimensions
Thickness
0.03–0.12
(0.75–3.0)
X
0.83 +0.01
(21.2 +0.1)
Y
1.46 + 0.01
(37.0 +0.1)
X
Y
LED 1 LED 2
1.81 (46.0)
0.98
(25.0)
ON ONOFF
0.32
(8.0)
1.11
(28.2)
0.09
(2.2)
0.25
(6.4)
1.43 (36.2)
0.81
(20.7)
0.44
(11.2)
0.03
(0.8)
0.81
(20.7)
V11-T2-72 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.11
Rockers
8064/8065—ESPORT
8064/8065 Series
Contents
Description Page
8064/8065—ESPORT
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-73
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-74
Icon/Legend Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-74
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-75
Product Description
The ergonomically designed
ESPORT Series comes with
a large, independent LED-
illuminated indicator window
that clearly identifies the
switch’s labeled function—
your label or ours. The switch
can be ordered with an LED
illuminated actuator, as well.
All ESPORT switches are
molded in a clean matte finish
and operate with a definite
tactile feel. Actuation of the
switch feels crisp. Also,
ESPORT switches will accept
loads up to15A. Due to the
LED’s long life, lamp
replacement should not be
necessary.
Tested in America’s toughest
truck applications, the
ESPORT switch is reliable
and durable and is available
with a full range of rugged
single- and two-pole circuits.
It has an optional polarized
lock-on connector. Spade
switch terminals are tin-
plated for long storage life.
Features and Benefits
●Contact Mechanism
Slow-make/slow-break
contact mechanism. Butt
action contact mechanism
designed specifically for use
on AC and low voltage DC
applications.
●Rocker Material
Thermoplastic rocker
actuators. Different colors are
available. The rocker and the
bezel are a high-grade nylon
and are supplied with an
aesthetically pleasing matte
finish.
●Lamps
Durable, long-life LED
illumination; 14 Vdc is
standard. Integral indicator
is illuminated by two
independent green, yellow
or red LEDs while the
actuator is lighted using
one dependent LED. For
additional LED voltages and/
or colors, contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
●Mounting Means
Snap-in mounting with plastic
bezel.
●Lenses
All switches can be ordered
with either a frosted clear
lens (Cat. No. 28-5555) or
a translucent white lens
(Cat. No. 28-5555-2). The
clear lens will allow the
maximum amount of diffused
light to flow through your
label or one of ours. The
white lens is shipped
unassembled to facilitate the
addition of your engraved or
pad-printed legend.
●Labels
The lens area of the integral
indicator will accept a label
0.750 x 0.450 and 0.010 in
(19.05 x 11.43 x 0.25 mm)
thick. Our selection of
standard labels with white
legends on black poly-
carbonate background can
be found on Page V11-T2-74.
Options
●Additional colors of rockers
and mounting bezels are
available
●Special circuits
●Special ratings
●Dry circuit capabilities
●Pad-printed legends on
lens, rocker and bezel
●Special indicator legend
labels
●Special LEDs and LED
voltages
●Special actuators
●Reversing jumpers
●Solder terminals and other
terminal types
●Wire leads
●Polarized lock-on
connector: 28-5558
●Full-size Euro-Look panel
plugs: 17-19544-2
For information on optional
features, contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
Standards and
Certifications
●UL Recognized and
recognized component
for Canada: File 2702
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-73
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.11
Rockers
8064/8065—ESPORT
ESPORT Full-Size Rocker Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—ESPORT, Non-Illuminated
How To Order—ESPORT, Illuminated
Notes
1Momentary contact.
2White lenses are furnished unassembled.
Rocker Color
B = Black
W = White
R =Red
G =Gray
Rocker Style
S = 1 in paddle
L = 1.5 in paddle
B =Rocker
8 0 6 4 K 1 0
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base
Circuit
Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc
1PST 5-6
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
5-4
8064K10
8064K11
1PDT
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
8064K14
8064K12
8064K17
8064K16
2PST 2-3, 5-6
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
2-1, 5-4 1
8064K20
8064K21
2PDT
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
8064K24
8064K22
8064K27
8064K26
Example:
Rocker
LED Color
Z =None
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
L R Z 1 W 2
Indicator
LED Color
R = Red
Y = Yellow
G = Green
LED Voltage
1 = 14 Vdc
2 = 28 Vdc Lens Color
1 = Clear
2 = White 2
Rocker Color
B = Black
W = White
R =Red
G =Gray
Rocker Style
B =Rocker
S = 1 in paddle
8 0 6 5 K 1 0
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base
Circuit
Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc 1PST 5-6 NONE OFF 8065K10
Example:
Rocker
LED Color
R =Red
Y = Yellow
G = Green
Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
S R Y 1 W 2
Indicator
LED Color
R = Red
Y = Yellow
G = Green
LED Voltage
1 = 14 Vdc
2 = 28 Vdc
Lens Color
1 = Clear
2 = White 2
V11-T2-74 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.11
Rockers
8064/8065—ESPORT
Technical Data and Specifications
8064/8065—ESPORT
Icon/Legend Selection
●All labels below come with adhesive backing
●Label legends are distinct and easily readable when illuminated from behind
●Additional labels are available upon request. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative
Icons and Legends
Note
1Ordering Code: If a standard label is required, add the Ordering Code to the end of ESPORT Switch part number preceded
by a dash. Example: To order 8065K10BYR1B1 with the 0684 Fog Lights label, the part number will be 8065K10BYR1B1-0684.
Description Specification
Ratings 15A at 125 Vac; 10A at 250 Vac; 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
Circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT
Maintained and momentary action
Contact material Movable—Silver-plated copper with silver contact face button
Stationary—Copper with silver contact face button
Mechanical life Maintained—100,000 operations, minimum
Momentary—25,000 operations, minimum
Terminal types Switch—Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade, tintillate-plated brass
Integral indicator—0.110 x 0.032 in (2.79 x 0.813 mm) spade, tintillate-plated brass
Base material Thermoset molding material
Dielectric 1000V rms, minimum
Mounting means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel
Legend Style
Ordering
Code 1Icon Description
Ordering
Code 1
Dome
Light
Helvetica Narrow
0.135 in (3.43 mm) high
White translucent letters
Opaque black background
0055 Windshield Wiper
SAE Specification No. J1362-0086
White graphic on a black background
0057
Work
Light 0056
TV/VCR 0065
Fridge 0066 Windshield Washer
SAE Specification No. J1362-0087
White graphic on a black background
0986
Cruise
ON/OFF 0067
Brake
Select 0068
Brake
ON/OFF 0069 Master Lighting Switch
SAE Specification No. J1362-5012
White graphic on a black background
0687
Fan
Override 0071
Cruise Set 0681
Engine
Brake 0682 Fog Lights
SAE Specification No. J1362-0633
White graphic on a black background
0684
Left
Window 0683
Power
Mirror 0688 Clearance/Position Light
SAE Specification No. J1362-0456
White graphics on a black background
0686
Right
Window 0689
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-75
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.11
Rockers
8064/8065—ESPORT
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
USA
6 5 4 -8
3 2 1 +7
USA
R 0.156 ± 0.127
(R 3.96 ± 3.23)
Location of LED
when Illuminated
See Detail A for
Label Dimensions
0.110 (2.79)
0.004 (0.11) Thick 0.250 (6.35)
0.010 (0.25) Thick
Panel
Opening
2 PDT—Non-Illuminated
Bottom View
Label Dimensions
Detail A
-8 4 5 6
0.030 ± 0.010
(0.76 ± 0.25)
1.598 ± 0.030
(40.59 ± 0.76)
0.100 ± 0.010
(2.54 ± 0.25)
1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.13)
0.750 ± 0.008
(19.05 ± 0.20)
0.450 ± 0.006
(11.43 ± 0.15)
0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)
0.434 ± 0.029
(11.02 ± 0.76)
1.064 ± 0.012
(27.03 ± 0.31)
1.970 ± 0.012
(50.04 ± 0.31)
Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness:
0.060 to 0.150 (1.52 to 3.81)
1 PST—Illuminated
Bottom View
1.598 ± 0.029
(40.59 ± 0.76)
6 5 4 -8
3 2 1 +7
V11-T2-76 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.12
Rockers
Accessories
Dimensions for NGR, EURO SR, Full Size Euro-Look and ESPORT Rocker Accessories
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
NGR Connector Euro/SR and Full Size Euro-Look Connector
ESPORT Connector
7
4
5A
5B
6
8
0.962 ± 0.029
(24.38 ± 0.76) 1.815 ± 0.059
(45.97 ± 1.52)
1.877 ± 0.059
(47.50 ± 1.52)
NGR Connector Catalog Number
28-5637-2 accepts Packard
12015870 Metri-Pack terminals
or AMP compatible connector
28-5940 accepts AMP
terminals 42100-2.
1.335 ± 0.005
(33.78 ± 0.13)
0.954 ± 0.005
(24.13 ± 0.13)
2.180 (55.37)
0.910
(23.11)
0.812
(20.62)
0.812
(20.62)
0.698
(17.73)
1.400
(35.56)
1.255
(31.88)
0.976
(24.79)
1.400
(35.56)
Euro-Look and EURO/SR
Connector Catalog Number
28-3426 accepts Packard
12015870 Metri-Pack
terminals.
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
8
Retaining hinge functions to keep parts intact
through shipment and handling. Fracture
of the hinges does not affect form, t or function
of the connector and its terminal retention
features.
Dimension Applies at
Base of Snap Leg
1.697 ± 0.020
(43.10 ± 0.51)
0.910 ± 0.020
(23.11 ± 0.51) 1.392 ± 0.014
(35.36 ± 0.38)
2.180 ± 0.020
(55.37 ± 0.51)
1.701 ± 0.020
(43.21 ± 0.51)
ESPORT Connector
Catalog Number 28-5558
Locations 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 accept
Packard 12015870 Metri-Pack terminals.
Locations 7 and 8 accept Packard
12034046 Metri-Pack terminals.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-77
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.12
Rockers
Accessories
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Gang Mounting System
NGR, Euro-Look and ESPORT Panel Plugs EURO SR Panel Plugs
1.030
(26.16)
2.026 + 0.010
(51.46 + 0.25/– 0.000)
3.056 + 0.010
(77.62 + 0.51/– 0.000)
2.060 (52.32)
1.897
(48.18)
R 0.125
(R 3.18) 0.867
(22.02)
1.734
(44.02)
2.000
(50.8)
2.280
(57.91)
End
Bezel
R 0.187 (R 4.75)
R 0.165 (R 4.19) 0.661
(16.79)
0.150
(3.81)
1.200
(30.48)
0.494
(12.55)
1.0 09
(25.63)
(2) End Bezels
Panel Opening
for 2 End Bezels
(2) End Bezels and (1) Center Bezel
Panel Opening—Reference Only
Thickness: 0.039 to 0.078 to 0.118
(1.00 to 2.00 to 3.00)
Dimensions: 2.026 + 0.254/−0.00 (51.46 + 0.254/–0.000)
Plus Number of Center Bezels Times 1.03
Tolerence: +0.254/−0.000 (+ 0.254/–0.000) for Each
Center Bezel up to a Maximum of + 0.0002 (+ 0.050)
1.900 ± 0.020
(48.26 + 0.51/– 0.00)
1.900 ± 0.020
(48.26 + 0.51/– 0.00)
Bezel Catalog Numbers
End Center
NGR 17-21160 17-21159
Euro-Look 17-19264 17-19263
A
C
B
E
D
1.380
(35.05)
1.530
(38.86)
0.847
(21.51)
Bottom
View
1.024
(26.01)
1.970
(50.04)
1.734 + 0.005/– 0.000
(44.04 + 0.13/– 0.00)
Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness: 0.030 to 0.190
(0.76 to 4.83)
Panel plug Catalog Number
17-19544-2 for Use with
Euro-Look and ESPORT.
NGR panel plug Catalog
Number 17-21543.
Part will also t Eaton
gang mounting boxes.
Catalog Numbers
17-19263 and
17-19264
0.867 + 0.005/– 0.000
(22.02 + 0.13/– 0.00)
Euro-Look
ESPORT NGR
A 0.080 (2.03) 0.100 (2.54)
B R 0.060 (R 1.52) R 0.080 (R 2.03)
C 0.340 (8.64) 0.335 (8.51)
D 0.530 (13.46) 0.550 (13.97)
E R 0.156 (R 3.96) R 0.250 (R 6.35)
1.255 + 0.009/ –0.001
(31.88 +0.25/ –0.03)
Top
View
R 0.156
(R 3.96)
0.985 ± 0.007
(25.02 ± 0.20)
1.735 ± 0.012
(44.07 ± 0.31)
0.130 ± 0.010
(3.30 ± 0.25)
1.427 ± 0.005
(36.25 ± 0.13)
1.450
(36.83)
0.680
(16.66)
0.830
(21.08)
0.820 ± 0.005
(20.83 ± 0.13)
1.19 0
(30.23)
Panel
Opening
Panel Plug Catalog Number 53-3318
For Use with EURO/SR
Panel Opening—Reference Only
Thickness:
0.040 to 0.140 (1.01 to 3.55)
Best Results Obtained From:
0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.17)
0.650 +0.010/ –0.001
(16.51 +0.25/ –0.02)
V11-T2-78 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.13
Rockers
Technical Data
Terminal Identification
When specified on order,
switches will have the terminals
identified as shown in the
illustration at right. Terminal
markings will be ink-stamped on
the side of the switch case and
unused terminal positions will
not be identified.
All views are rear of switch with
keyway or at down as applicable.
Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and
5 and 8 are considered inboard
terminals for single-, two- and
four-pole switches respectively.
All others are considered
outboard.
“Three Independent” ON-ON-ON Circuit Diagram
For switch modified with “Three Independent” ON-ON-ON
special circuit. External jumpers are required. User to connect
wiring per instructions given below.
ON-ON-ON Special Circuit
Circuit Diagrams
Rocker Circuit Diagrams
Legends
Rocker Switch Legend
See next page for Midsize Switch Circuit Diagrams. See Page V11-T2-17
for NGR Circuit Diagrams.
Notes
1Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
2Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
3Dependent lamp.
4Independent lamp.
5Two circuit—indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two circuits being
controlled may be independent of each other.
6For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available.
7Available in 1PDT or 2PDT.
Connection Points Single-Pole
Connect common to terminals 2
Connect circuit “A” to terminals 6
Connect circuit “B” to terminals 4
Connect circuit “C” to terminals 1
Circuit with Lever in …
3 ON
Independent
No. of
Poles
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
(Maintained)
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
1 PDT 1
Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Single-
Pole
Two-
Pole
Four-
Pole
123
456
123
456
123
456
Circuit Letter Schematic Circuit Letter Schematic
A
1PST
I
2 Circuit 5
B
1PDT
J
1PST
C
2PST
K
1PDT
D
2PDT
L
2PST
E
4PST 1
M
2PST
F
4PDT 2
N 6
2PDT
G 3
1PST
P
1PDT
H 4
1PDT
Q 7
2 Circuit
Legend Rocker Switch Type
Contact terminal—will make contact with switch lever
Isolated terminal—does not make contact with lever
Center terminal and switch lever
Bulb
Momentary contact
Denotes mechanical contact portion
3
2
36
14
2
3
1
3
2
6
5
2
3
1
5
6
4
4
31
2
3
2
6
5
9
8
12
11
13
24
2
3
1
5
6
4
8
9
7
11
12
10
3
2
4
6
3
2
4
6
B
A
C
C
NC NO
G
H
NONC
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-79
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.13
Rockers
Te c hn i c a l D at a
Midsize Switch Circuit Diagrams 1
Non-Illuminated Illuminated
Notes
1Terminal numbers 1, 2 and 3 denote single-pole base.
Terminal numbers 11, 12, 113, 24, 25 and 26 denote two-pole base.
2Single-pole in two-pole base with lamp independently wired.
3Two-pole—independently wired lamp.
Circuit
Number
(Circuit
Designator)
Circuit with Rocker In …
Schematic
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
1
1PST
OFF NONE ON
2
1PST
OFF NONE ON
3
1PST
OFF NONE MOM. ON
4
1PST
OFF NONE ON
5
1PDT
ON NONE ON
6
1PDT
ON OFF ON
7
1PDT
MOM. ON NONE ON
8
1PDT
ON OFF MOM. ON
9
1PDT
MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
10
2PST
OFF NONE ON
11
2PST
OFF NONE MOM. ON
12
2PST
MOM. OFF NONE ON
13
2PDT
ON NONE ON
14
2PDT
ON OFF ON
15
2PDT
MOM. ON NONE ON
16
2PDT
ON OFF MOM. ON
17
2PDT
MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON
1
2
11
12
1
2
1
2
1
23
1
32
1
32
1
32
1
2
3
11 24
12 25
11 24
12 25
11 24
12 25
11 24
12 316252
11 24
13 26 25
12
11 24
13 26 25
12
11 24
21526231
11 24
13 12 26 25
Circuit
Number
(Circuit
Designator)
Circuit with Rocker In …
Schematic
DOWN
Position
CENTER
Position
UP
Position
18
1PST
OFF NONE ON
19
1PST
OFF NONE ON
20
1PST 2
OFF NONE ON
21
1PST
OFF NONE MOM. ON
22
1PDT
MOM. OFF NONE ON
23
1PDT
ON NONE ON
24
1PDT
ON OFF ON
25
1PDT
MOM. ON NONE ON
26
1PDT
ON OFF ON
27
2PST
ON OFF ON
28
2PST
ON NONE ON
29
2PST 3
ON NONE ON
30
2PDT
MOM. ON NONE MOM. ON
31
2PDT
ON NONE ON
32
Indicator
———
12
3
11 24
12
11 25 26
12
12
3
11 13
12
24 13
25 26
24
26 25
13
24
26 25
13
26
24
25
13
26
24
25
13
12 25
24
11
11
13 26
12
24
25
24
11
25
12
12 25
2411
32
V11-T2-80 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
AN
AP
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
AV
AW
AX
AY
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
BF
BG
BH
BI
BJ
BK
BL
BM
BN
BP
BQ
BR
BS
BT
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
BU
BV
BW
BX
BY
BZ
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
CG
CH
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-81
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
CI
CJ
CK
CL
CM
CN
CP
CQ
CR
CS
CT
CU
CV
CW
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
CX
CY
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
DG
DH
DJ
DK
DL
DM
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
DN
DP
DQ
DR
DS
DT
DU
DV
DW
DX
DY
DZ
EA
EB
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
EC
ED
EE
EF
EG
EH
EI
EJ
EK
EL
EM
EN
EO
EP
V11-T2-82 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
EQ
ER
ES
ET
EU
EV
EW
EX
EY
EZ
FA
FB
FC
FD
1
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
FE
FF
FG
FH
FI
FJ
FK
FL
FM
FN
FO
FP
FQ
FR
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
FS
FT
FU
FV
FW
FX
FY
FZ
GA
GB
GC
GD
GE
GF
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
GG
GH
GI
GJ
GK
GL
GM
GN
GP
GQ
GR
GS
GT
GU
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-83
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
GV
GW
GY
HA
HB
HC
HD
HE
HF
HG
HH
HJ
HK
HL
PASILLO
LUZ
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
HM
HN
HP
HQ
HR
HS
HT
HU
HV
HW
HY
JA
JB
JC
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
JD
JE
JF
JG
JH
JJ
JK
JL
JM
JN
JP
JQ
JR
JS
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
JT
JU
JV
JW
JX
JY
JZ
KA
KB
KC
KD
KE
KF
KG
V11-T2-84 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
KH
KI
KJ
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KP
KQ
KR
KS
KT
KU
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
KV
KW
KX
KY
KZ
LA
LB
LC
LD
LE
LF
LG
LH
LI
DIAG
CRUISE
SELECT
TEST
ALARMS
OVERHEAT
AUX HYD
VIDEO
ENTER
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
LJ
LK
LL
LM
LN
LO
LP
LQ
LR
LS
LT
LU
LV
LW
EXIT
BRK
EXH
24V.
CHARGER
AQUA
HOT
HEAT
EXCHGR
AIR
COMPSR
PA
G-AUX
START
A/C
CNTR
REAR
A/C
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-85
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR Only Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
LX
LY
LZ
MA
MB
MC
MD
ME
MF
MG
MH
MI
MJ
MK
DIAG
CODE
LIGHT
POSITION
MASTER
WARN
UPPER
WARN
LOWER
WARN
COMPT
LIGHTS
WORK
LIGHTS
FAST
IDLE
MIRROR
HEAT
GEN
PTO
WIGWAG
SIREN
BRAKE
LEFT
SCENE
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
ML
MM
MN
MO
MP
MS
MT
MU
MV
MW
MX
MY
MZ
NA
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
NB
NC
ND
NE
NF
NG
NH
NI
NJ
NK
NL
NM
NN
NO
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
NP
NQ
NR
NS
NT
NU
NV
NW
NX
NY
NZ
PA
PB
PC
V11-T2-86 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR Only Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
PD
PE
PF
PG
PH
PI
PJ
PK
PL
PM
PN
PP
PQ
PR
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
PS
PT
PU
PV
PW
PX
PY
PZ
RA
RB
RC
RD
RE
RF
AXLE
OVER
DRIVE
LOAD
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
RG
RH
RI
RJ
RK
RL
RM
RN
RP
RQ
RS
RT
RU
RV
ENGINE
CHECK
CODE
ABS
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
RW
RX
RY
RZ
SA
SB
SC
SD
SE
SF
SG
SH
SJ
SK
D
H
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-87
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR Only Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
SL
SM
SN
SP
SQ
SR
SS
ST
SU
SV
SW
SX
SY
SZ
Mode
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
TA
TB
TC
TD
TE
TF
TG
TH
TJ
TK
TL
TM
TN
TP
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
TQ
TR
TS
TT
TU
TV
TW
TX
TY
TZ
UA
UB
UC
UD
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
UE
UF
UG
UH
UK
UL
UM
UN
UP
UR
US
UT
UU
UV
V11-T2-88 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR Only Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
UW
UX
UY
UZ
VA
VB
VC
VD
VE
VF
VG
VH
VK
VL
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
VM
VN
VP
VR
VS
VT
VU
VV
VW
VX
VY
VZ
WA
WB
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
WC
WD
WE
WF
WG
WH
WJ
WK
WL
WM
WN
WP
WR
WS
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
WT
WU
WV
WW
WX
WY
WZ
XA
XB
XC
XD
XE
XF
XG
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-89
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR Only Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
XH
XJ
XK
XL
XM
XN
XP
XR
XS
XT
XU
XV
XW
XX
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
XY
XZ
YA
YB
YC
YD
YE
YF
YG
YH
YJ
YK
YL
YM
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
YN
YP
YQ
YR
YS
YT
YU
YV
YW
YX
YY
YZ
ZA
ZB
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
ZC
ZD
ZE
ZF
ZG
ZH
ZJ
ZK
ZL
ZM
ZN
ZP
ZR
ZS
V11-T2-90 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR Only Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
ZT
ZU
ZV
ZW
ZX
ZY
ZZ
A1
B1
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
H1
J1
K1
L1
M1
N1
P1
R1
S1
T1
U1
V1
W1
X1
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Y1
Z1
A2
B2
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
H2
J2
K2
L2
M2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
N2
P2
R2
S2
T2
U2
V2
W2
X2
Y2
Z2
A3
B3
C3
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-91
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR Only Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
D3
E3
F3
G3
H3
J3
K3
L3
M3
N3
P3
Q3
R3
S3
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
T3
U3
V3
W3
X3
Y3
Z3
A4
B4
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
H4
J4
K4
L4
M4
N4
P4
R4
S4
T4
U4
V4
W4
X4
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Y4
Z4
A5
B5
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
H5
J5
K5
L5
M5
V11-T2-92 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR Only Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
N5
P5
Q5
R5
S5
T5
U5
V5
W5
X5
Y5
Z5
A6
B6
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
C6
D6D6
E6
F6
G6
H6
J6
K6
L6
M6
N6
P6
Q6
R6
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
S6
T6
U6
V6
W6
X6
Y6
Z6
A7
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
G7
H7
J7
K7
L7
M7
N7
P7
Q7
R7
S7
T7
U7
V7
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-93
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR Only Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
W7
X7
Y7
Z7
A8
B8
C8
D8
E8
F8
G8
H8
J8
K8
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
L8
M8
N8
P8
Q8
R8
S8
T8
U8
V8
W8
X8
Y8
Z8
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
A9
B9
C9
D9
E9
F9
G9
H9
J9
K9
L9
M9
N9
P9
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Q9
R9
S9
T9
U9
V9
W9
X9
Y9
Z9
1A
1B
1C
1D
V11-T2-94 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
NGR Only Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
1E
1F
1G
1H
1J
1K
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
1L
1M
1N
1P
1Q
1R
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
1S
1T
1U
1V
1W
1X
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
1Y
1Z
2A
2B
2C
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-95
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
LX
LY
MA
MB
MC
MD
ME
MF
MG
MH
MI
MJ
MK
ML
2
HI
RPM
LOW
RPM
TEST
P
RSM/ACC
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
MM
MN
MP
MQ
MR
MS
MT
MU
MV
MW
MX
MY
MZ
NA
SET/CST
SHDN
OVRD
EXHST
BRK
P
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
NB
NC
ND
NE
NF
NG
NH
NJ
NK
NL
NM
NN
NP
NQ
F
N
AUX
WARN
LOAD
OVER
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
NR
NS
NT
NU
NV
NW
NX
NY
NZ
O3
PA
PB
PC
PD
V11-T2-96 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
PE
PF
PG
PH
PI
PJ
PK
PL
PM
PN
PP
PQ
PR
PS
AUTO
AUTO
n/min
n/min
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
PT
PU
PV
PW
PX
PY
PZ
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
QH
QJ
QK
QL
QM
QN
QP
QQ
QR
QS
QT
QU
QV
QW
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
QX
QY
QZ
RA
RB
RC
RD
RE
RF
RG
RH
RJ
RK
RL
ACCEL
SET
DECEL
RESUME
CTIS
WINCH
CRANE
MODE
AUTO
MAN
MODE
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-97
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
RM
RN
RP
RQ
RR
RS
RT
RU
RV
RW
RX
RY
RZ
SA
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
SB
SC
SD
SE
SF
SG
SH
SJ
SK
SL
SM
SN
SP
SQ
ENG
DIAG
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
SR
SS
ST
SU
SV
SW
SX
SY
SZ
TA
TB
TC
TD
TE
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
TF
TG
TH
TJ
TK
TL
TM
TN
TP
TQ
TR
TS
TT
TU
RPM
CTRL
ALARM
CHEM
V11-T2-98 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
TV
TW
TX
TY
TZ
UA
UB
UC
UD
UE
UF
UG
UH
UJ
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
UK
UL
UM
UN
UP
UQ
UR
US
UT
UU
UV
UW
UX
UY
P
F
LH
RH
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
UZ
VA
VB
VC
VD
VE
VF
VG
VH
VJ
VK
VL
VM
VN
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
VP
VQ
VR
VS
VT
VU
VV
VW
VX
VY
VZ
WA
WB
WC
FAULT OK
AUTO
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-99
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
WD
WE
WF
WG
WH
WJ
WK
WL
WM
WN
WP
WQ
WR
WS
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
WT
WU
WV
WX
WY
WZ
XA
XB
XC
XD
XE
XF
XG
XH
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
XJ
XL
XM
XN
XP
XQ
XR
XS
XT
XU
XV
XW
XY
XZ
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
YA
YB
YC
YD
YE
YF
YG
YH
YJ
YK
YL
YM
YN
YP
SET/RES
V11-T2-100 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
YQ
YR
YS
YT
YU
YV
YW
YX
YY
YZ
ZA
ZB
ZC
ZD
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
ZE
ZF
ZG
ZH
ZJ
ZK
ZL
ZM
ZN
ZP
ZR
ZS
ZT
ZU
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
ZV
ZW
ZX
ZY
ZZ
A1
B1
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
H1
J1
RPM
RPM
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
K1
L1
M1
N1
P1
R1
S1
T1
U1
V1
W1
X1
Y1
Z1
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T2-101
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
A2
B2
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
H2
J2
K2
L2
M2
N2
P2
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
R2
S2
T2
U2
V2
W2
X2
Y2
Z2
A3
B3
C3
D3
F3
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
G3
H3
I3
J3
K3
L3
M3
N3
O3
P3
Q3
R3
S3
T3
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
U3
V3
W3
X3
Y3
Z3
A4
B4
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
H4
V11-T2-102 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.14
Rockers
Symbols Library
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 12
1Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2SAE Specification No. J1362.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
I4
J4
K4
L4
M4
N4
O4
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
P4
Q4
R4
S4
T4
U4
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
V4
W4
X4
Y4
Z4
A5
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
B5
C5
D5
X5
X6
X7
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T3-1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Special Devices
Keylock
Locking Rocker
High Capacity Switch
Panel Board Switch
3.1 High Capacity Switches
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-2
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-2
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-2
3.2 Panelboard Switches
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-3
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-4
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-4
3.3 Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-5
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-5
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-7
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-7
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-8
3.4 Locking Rocker
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-9
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-9
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-9
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-10
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-10
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-10
V11-T3-2 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1
Special Devices
High Capacity Switches
High Capacity Switch
Contents
Description
High Capacity Switches
Product Description
The heavy duty high capacity
switch, Catalog Number
7818K1 is ideal for
exceptionally high-power
applications, for heavy-duty
motor loads and for use in
welding equipment or similar
industrial applications.
By combining innovative
design and quality materials,
this switch is designed to
carry the specified maximum
inrush current for 10
milliseconds for a minimum
of 20,000 ON/OFF cycles.
Standards and
Certifications
●UL® to Standard 508,
File E147754
Product Selection
High Capacity Switch
Description Catalog Number
40A, 600 Vac
5 hp, 250 Vac
7818K1
Technical Data and Specifications
High Capacity Switches
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
7818K1
Description Specification
Circuits 2PST, maintained
Contact mechanism Quick-make/quick-break snap acting butt contact
Make: 200A peak inrush at 125 Vac for 10 ms for 20,000 cycles minimum
Break: 20A at 125 Vac for 20,000 cycles minimum
Contact material 10% silver cadmium oxide composite
Terminal types Screw—brass (Catalog Number 11-6074-4) supplied. Furnish unassembled
Mounting means Molded flush mounting bracket, high impact polycarbonate, 3.312 in (84.12 mm),
center-to-center spacing and 2.375 in (60.33 mm) spacing for self-tapping screws
Lever Nylon
Base Molded thermoset material
Dielectric withstand 2200V rms minimum
1.406 (35.71)
Max.
3.812 (96.82)
3.281 (83.34) Mtg.
1.250
(31.75)
2.250 (57.15)
Max.
0.781
(19.84)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T3-3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Special Devices
Panelboard Switches
Panel Board Switches
Contents
Description Page
Panelboard Switches
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-4
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-4
Product Description
This group of two-position
power toggle switches is
used by manufacturers in a
wide variety of applications
that require dependability
and long service, such as
welding equipment,
commercial floor polishers,
battery chargers, food
processors and panelboards.
Standards and
Certifications
●UL Recognized
●CSA® Certified as noted
V11-T3-4 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Special Devices
Panelboard Switches
Product Selection
Panelboard Switches
Technical Data and Specifications
Panelboard Switches
Notes
1For appliance use only; 32A, 480 Vac, 25A, 600 Vac.
2CSA Certified.
3Binding screws assembled. For binding screws provided unassembled, order Catalog Number 8980K30.
Rating
Poles
and Throw Mounting Terminals Catalog Number
60A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2 hp, 125–250 Vac/Vdc 1
2PST N/A N/A 8980K1 2
30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
30A, 125V “T”
2 hp, 120–240 Vac
1P double break Frame plate Center bus 8980K2
30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
20A, 600 Vac
2 hp, 120–600 Vac
2PST Panel type strap Screw 8980K5
30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
20A, 600 Vac
2 hp, 120–600 Vac
Three-phase
3PST Panel type Screw 8980K6
30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2 hp, 120–240 Vac
1 hp, 480 Vac
2PST Panel type strap Screw 8980K14 3
30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2 hp, 120–240 Vac
2PST Panel type strap Screw 8980K16
Description Specification
Rating 10–60A; 120–600V
See Product Selection table
Circuits 1PST, 2PST, 3PST 2 circuit, maintained
Except for Catalog Number 8980K13, momentary
Contact mechanism Quick-make/quick-break wiping action
Except for Catalog Number 8980K13, quick-make/quick-break butt contact
Contact material Movable—bronze; stationary—copper; Catalog Number 8980K13—silver
Terminal types Screw or bus
Termination material Copper
Mounting means Two-hole mounting—panel type flush
Dielectric withstand 1000 volts rms minimum
Operating temperature range 0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)
8980K1
8980K5
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T3-5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Special Devices
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
General Purpose and Heavy Duty Keylocks
Contents
Description Page
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy
Duty—AC/DC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-7
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-7
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-8
Product Description
General Purpose
These keylock switches
provide reliable performance
in a space-saving design.
They all use quick-make/
quick-break switching
mechanisms, with wiping
action blades for self-cleaning
contacts.
Heavy Duty
These switches have a slow-
make/slow-break switching
mechanism with large butt
type contacts. Their high
current switching capability
allows them to be used for
locking switching circuits in
power applications.
Features
Termination Types
General Purpose
Solder lugs—Brass silver-
plated
Heavy Duty
●7842 Series
Screw terminals—Brass
designed to accept #7-32 x
3/16 binding head screws
Furnished unassembled
●7846 Series
Quick connect terminals—
Brass
Mounting Means
General Purpose
Threaded bushing—0.468 in
(11.89 mm) dia.
Keyway—0.062–0.067 in
wide x 0.035–0.370 deep
(1.55–1.70 mm wide x
0.89–0.94 mm deep
Hardware supplied—
1 hexnut (Cat. No. 15-192)
and 1 chamfered dress nut
(Cat. No. 15-994-2)
Furnished unassembled
Heavy Duty
●7842 Series
Slotted bushing—0.468 in
(11.89 mm) dia.
Hardware supplied—
4 terminal screws and
1 hexnut
Furnished unassembled
●7846 Series
Hardware supplied—
2 hexnuts
V11-T3-6 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Special Devices
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
Product Selection
General Purpose Keylock AC/DC Switches
Heavy Duty Keylock AC Rated Switches
Note
1 Not CSA Certified.
Circuit with Key in … (Keyway Down)
Key
Removal
PositionRating
Poles and
Throw
LEFT
Position
CENTER
Position
(Keyway)
RIGHT
Position
Solder Lug Terminal
Catalog Number
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vac/Vdc
1PST —
—
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
CENTER
CENTER and RIGHT
8928K492
8928K493
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1A, 250 Vac/Vdc
1PDT — ON ON CENTER and RIGHT 8928K494
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1-1/2A, 250 Vdc
1PDT — ON ON CENTER 8283K150
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vdc
2PST —
—
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
CENTER
CENTER
8370K150
8370K151
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2PST — OFF ON CENTER and RIGHT 8928K495
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vdc
2PDT —
—
ON
ON
ON
ON
CENTER
CENTER and RIGHT
8373K150
8373K151
Key Removal
Position
Slotted Bushing Length Type of
Termination
Catalog
NumberRating Circuit Action Inches mm Key Style
7846 Type Series
20A, 120 Vac
20A, 240 Vac
1-1/2 hp, 120 Vac
2 hp, 240 Vac
2PST OFF-ON-OFF-ON OFF 0.50 12.7 Quick Connect E (13-8173) 7846K1 1
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T3-7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Special Devices
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
Accessories
Keys for Locking Switches
Additional keys may be
ordered from the Key
Selection table.
Key styles shown match
those listed for specific
switches in the Product
Selection tables.
Key Selection
Rotary Keylock Brackets—
Security Tumbler Type
This series of rotary keylock
is designed for use in security
applications. They provide a
simple method of converting
single- and two-pole toggle
switches. For use with two-
or three-position switches.
Key Selection
Technical Data and Specifications
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
Rotary Keylock Brackets
13-5496
13-8171
13-8173
Where Used
Catalog
Number
General purpose and heavy
duty series
13-5496
Security locking bracket 13-8171
7846K1 13-8173
Where Used
Catalog
Number
Key removable in counter-
clockwise position
8980P25
Key removable in clockwise
position
8980P27
Key removable in either
extreme position
8980P28
Description General Purpose Heavy Duty
Circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT
Maintained action
2PST, 2-circuit
maintained
Contact mechanism Quick-make/quick-break wiping action Slow-make/slow-break butt contact
Contact material Movable—Bronze silver-plated
Stationary—Brass silver-plated
Movable—Silver cadmium oxide
Stationary—Silver cadmium oxide
Description Specification
Bushing 7/8 in dia., 24 threads/inch
Mounting hardware and keys
1 hexagon locknut Cat. No. 15-2528-2
1 bright chrome plated dress nut Cat. No. 15-2528-2 (furnished unassembled)
2 keys Cat. No. 13-8171
Finish
Lock bushing Diecast zinc
Lock barrel and dress nut Chrome plated brass
Keys Brass
V11-T3-8 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Special Devices
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8928K493—1PST/1PDT 8373K151—2PST/2PDT
7842K2—2PST 7846K1—2PST 8980P27
0.198 (5.03)
0.200 (5.08)
0.056 (1.42)
0.068 (1.73)
0.471 (11.96)
0.196
(4.97)
Dia.
0.473 (12.01)
0.061 (1.55)
0.063 (1.60)
0.490
(12.45)
18°
0.516
(13.11)
18°
Key Removable in
Both Positions
15/32−32 Thds.
Mtg. Hole
1.080
(27.43)
0.960
(24.38)
0.750
(19.05)
0.841
(21.36)
0.196
(4.97)
18°
0.516
(13.11)
0.545
(13.84)
1.375
(34.92) 0.010
(0.25)
0.220
(5.59) 0.735
(18.67)
0.175
(4.44)
0.823
(20.90)
0.687
(17.45)
1.080
(27.43)
15/32−32 Thds.
Key Removable in
Both Positions
18°
Dia.
Mtg. Hole
0.198 (5.03)
0.200 (5.08)
0.056 (1.42)
0.068 (1.73)
0.471 (11.96)
0.473 (12.01)
1.17 1
(29.74)
1.296
(32.92)
0.562
(14.27)
0.953
(24.21)
Keyway 0.065 W x 0.032−0.035 D
15/32−32 TPT
(1.65 W x 0.81−0.89 D)
0.500
(12.70)
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.044−0.046 D
15/32−32 TPT
0.718
(18.24)
0.343
(8.71)
1.312
(33.32)
0.906
(23.01)
(2.03–2.16 W x 1.12–1.17 D)
0.750
(19.05)
1.032
(26.21)
7/8–24 T.P.I.
(22.23)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T3-9
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.4
Special Devices
Locking Rockers
Locking Rockers
Contents
Description Page
Locking Rockers
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-10
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-10
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-10
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-10
Product Description
This unique switch features
a patented internal locking
mechanism, which allows the
switch to be locked in the
OFF position to prevent
unauthorized or accidental
operation. The key to locking
or unlocking the switch is a
removable paddle rocker cap,
which must be inserted in
order to move the switch to
the ON position. The switch
can still be turned OFF.
The locking rocker is ideally
suited for such markets
as portable tools, computers,
lawn and garden equipment,
marine and construction.
Standards and
Certifications
●UL Recognized
●CSA Certified
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note: Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for
selection information and
optional features.
Product Selection
Locking Rocker Switch
Notes
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.
2Ratings listed for 125 Vac also apply at 28 Vdc. Also supplied with a 20A, 277 Vac rating as standard.
Circuit with Rocker in …
Base Circuit
(See Page
V11-T3-10)
Catalog
NumberRating 2Poles and Throw
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
Without Palm Guard Feature
20A, 125 Vac
20A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 125 Vac
2 hp, 250 Vac
1PST ON NONE OFF A 8166K27
1PDT ON NONE ON B 8166K28
2PST ON NONE OFF C 8166K25
2PDT ON NONE ON D 8166K26
With Palm Guard Feature
20A, 125 Vac
20A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 125 Vac
2 hp, 250 Vac
1PST ON NONE OFF A 8166K23
1PDT ON NONE ON B 8166K24
2PST ON NONE OFF C 8166K21
2PDT ON NONE ON D 8166K22
V11-T3-10 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.4
Special Devices
Locking Rockers
Accessories
Replacement Cap
Technical Data and Specifications
Locking Rocker Switch
Circuit Diagrams
Locking Rocker Circuit Diagrams
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Locking Rocker Switch without Palm Guard
Locking Rocker Switch with Palm Guard
Description
Catalog
Number
Red paddle rocker replacement cap 53-3021-2
53-3021-2
Description Specification
Contact
mechanism
Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on
AC and low voltage DC applications
Contact
material
Movable—Silver-plated copper w/cad-oxide contact face button
Stationary—Copper w/cad-oxide contact face button
Terminal types 0.25 in spade terminals are standard
Rocker
material
Custom styled, red thermoplastic rocker key with “REMOVE TO LOCK”
across the top of the key in raised letters
Dielectric 1000V rms minimum
Circuit Letter Schematic Circuit Letter Schematic
A
1PST
C
2PST
B
1PDT
D
2PDT
3
2
3
2
6
5
2
3
1
2
3
1
5
6
4
1.080
(27.43)
0.250
(6.35)
0.440 (11.18)
0.745
(18.92)
1.700
(43.18)
1.19 0
(30.23)
1.450
(36.83)
0.960
(24.38)
0.650
(16.51)
0.680 (17.27)
0.830 (21.08)
Recommended
Panel Cutout
Dimensions
1.080
(27.43)
0.744
(18.90)
0.250
(6.35) 0.440
(11.18)
0.745
(18.92)
1.700
(43.18)
0.960
(24.38)
0.650 (16.51)
0.960 (24.38)
0.225
(5.72)
1.19 0
(30.23)
1.450
(36.83)
0.680 (17.27)
0.830 (21.08)
Recommended
Panel Cutout
Dimensions
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Toggle Switches
Military
Illuminated AC Rated
General Purpose AC/DC Rated
X Series Toggles
4.1 Introduction
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-2
4.2 Military Purpose Toggles
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-3
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-6
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-7
4.3 Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-9
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-10
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-10
4.4 General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-16
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-16
4.5 General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-20
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-21
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-21
4.6 X Series Toggles
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-24
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-25
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-25
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-26
4.7 Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-27
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-29
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-29
4.8 Accessories
Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31
Decorator Facenuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33
Panel Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33
Replacement Terminal Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33
Indicating Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-34
4.9 Technical Data
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-35
V11-T4-2 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.1
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
Introduction
Toggle Switches
Contents
Description
Military Purpose Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-3
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-9
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated. . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-11
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated. . . . . . . . V11-T4-20
X Series Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-24
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-27
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-35
Product Selection Guide
Toggle Switches
Military Purpose Toggles Illuminated AC Rated Switches
General Purpose Toggles—
AC Rated
Product Selection Page V11-T4-3 Page V11-T4-9 Page V11-T4-20
Circuit Diagram Page V11-T4-35 — Page V11-T4-35
Product Description Eaton’s military purpose switches
are designed to meet the
requirements of MIL-S-83731
These illuminated switches
are available only in single-pole
circuitry. A two-pole base is utilized
with single-pole housing the lamp.
These AC rated toggle switches offer
the widest selection of features and the
design flexibility to meet a variety of
applications.
General Purpose Toggles—
AC/DC Rated X Series Toggles Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Product Selection Page V11-T4-20 Page V11-T4-24 Page V11-T4-27
Circuit Diagram Page V11-T4-35 — Page V11-T4-35
Product Description This line of switches employs a quick-
make/quick-break contact mechanism.
These switches are especially suited for
use in small motor applications.
Eaton’s new, competitively priced, AC
rated X Series toggles offer a standard
high rating for both single- and two-pole
applications.
The most common application
for this switch is to help prevent
motor damage resulting from
the high current generation by
counter EMF of the armature at the
time of reversing.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.2
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
Military Purpose Toggles
Military Purpose Toggles
Contents
Description Page
Military Purpose Toggles
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-6
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-7
Product Description
Eaton’s military purpose
switches are designed to
meet the requirements of
MIL-S-83731. Sealed
Switches have a silicone
rubber lever seal assembled
between the lever and the
bushing to resist the entrance
of contaminants such as
dust, sand or water into the
contact structure.
The switch mechanisms are
completely enclosed to resist
the entrance of contaminants
into the switch. All metal
parts are plated to resist
corrosion. The heavy duty
switches are offered in both
standard toggle lever and
lever lock versions. Circuit
designations are stamped on
the side of each switch.
Standards and
Certifications
●MIL-S-83731
Product Selection
AC/DC Rated (Medium Duty) MIL-S-83731
Current Ratings
Circuit with Toggle in …
Base
Circuit
See
Page V11-T4-35
Dimension
“A”
Inches (mm)
Dimension
“B”
Inches (mm)
Military
Solder Lug Terminals
Current
Ratings
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Poles
and
Throw
MIL-S-83731
with Sealed
Lever
Catalog
Number
Single-Pole
See A
below
1PST ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
MOM. OFF
MOM. ON
A — 0.906 (23.01) MS25098-22
MS25098-29
MS25098-30
8261K22
8261K29
8261K30
See A
below
1PDT ON
ON
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
B 0.937 (23.80) — MS25098-23
MS25098-26
8261K23
8261K26
Tw o - Po l e
See B
below
2PST ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
MOM. OFF
MOM. ON
C — 0.906 (23.01) MS25100-22
MS25100-29
MS25100-30
8262K22
8262K29
8262K30
See C
below
2PDT ON
ON
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
D 0.937 (23.80) — MS25100-23
MS25100-26
8262K23
8262K26
Part Number
Current Capacity in Amperes
per Pole = 125 Vac, 60 Hz
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
A
B
C
AII MS25098
MS25100-22, 29, 30
MS25100-23, 26
3.0
3.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.0
V11-T4-4 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.2
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
Military Purpose Toggles
AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-S-83731 with Lever Seal
Current Ratings
Notes
1 Across terminals 2-3 and 5-6.
2 Across terminals 1-2 and 5-6.
3 Across terminals 2-3 and 4-5.
4 Across terminals 1-2 and 4-5.
5 For “INDEPENDENT ON-ON-ON” circuit arrangement, see Page V11-T4-35.
Circuit with Toggle in … Screw Terminals
with Sealed Lever
Current
Ratings
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length
“A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length
“B”
Inches (mm)
Poles
and
Throw
MS Part
Number
Catalog
Number
Single-Pole
See A
below
See B
below
1PST ON
ON
ON
ON
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
NONE
MOM. OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
NONE
MOM. OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
A 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) MS35058-22
MS35058-24
MS35058-29
MS35058-25
MS35058-28
MS35058-30
8801K22
8801K23
8813K17
8813K18
8811K18
8811K17
See A
below
See B
below
1PDT ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
B 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) MS35058-21
MS35058-23
MS35058-26
MS35058-27
MS35058-31
8800K16
8810K15
8804K13
8812K14
8809K16
Tw o - Po l e
See C
below
See D
below
2PST ON
ON
ON
ON
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
NONE
MOM. OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
NONE
MOM. OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
C 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) MS35059-22
MS35059-24
MS35059-29
MS35059-25
MS35059-28
MS35059-30
8822K20
8822K21
8828K13
8828K12
8826K14
8826K15
See C
below
See D
below
2PDT ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
D 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) MS35059-21
MS35059-23
MS35059-26
MS35059-27
MS35059-31
8820K16
8824K14
8830K13
8834K5
8832K6
See E
below
1P3T
in a
2P base
ON 1
ON 1
MOM. ON 1
ON 1
ON 1
MOM. ON 1
ON 2
ON 2
ON 2
ON 3
ON 3
ON 3
ON 4
MOM. ON 4
MOM. ON 4
ON 4
MOM. ON 4
MOM. ON 4
See
Page V11-T4-35
0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) MS25201-4
MS25201-5
MS25201-6
MS25201-7
MS25201-8
MS25201-9
8860K4
8860K5
8860K6
8860K7 5
8860K8 5
8860K9 5
Four-Pole
See F
below
See G
below
4PST ON
ON
ON
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
MOM. OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
NONE
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
E 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) —
MS25068-24
MS25068-25
MS25068-28
—
7660K12
7660K13
7668K7
7666K9
7666K6
See F
below
See G
below
4PDT ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
F 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) MS25068-21
MS25068-23
MS25068-26
MS25068-27
MS25068-31
7662K7
7664K5
7674K5
7672K5
7670K6
Switch
Type of
Operation
Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole
28 Vdc 115 Vac, 60 Hz 115 Vac, 400 Hz
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
MS35058
MS35058
MS35059
MS35059
MS25201
MS25068
MS25068
Maintained
Momentary
Maintained
Momentary
ON-ON-ON
Maintained
Momentary
7
5
7
5
5
5
4
25
20
20
18
18
20
18
15
10
15
10
10
12
10
—
—
—
—
2
—
—
10
10
20
11
11
—
—
10
7
—
—
8
—
—
3
—
4
—
2
4
2
10
—
20
—
11
20
11
10
—
15
—
8
15
5
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.2
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
Military Purpose Toggles
AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-S-83731 Lever Lock with Lever Seal
Indicates direction against which lever is locked.
Current Ratings
Note
1 See illustrations below for lever lock bushing styles.
Lever Lock Bushing Styles
These illustrations are for pictoral representation only—keyway on right-hand side.
Circuit with Toggle in … Screw Terminals
with Sealed Lever
Current
Ratings
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Base
Circuit
See
Page V11-T4-35
Lever
Lock
Bushing
Style 1
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever Lock
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Poles
and
Throw
MS Part
Number
Catalog
Number
Single-Pole
See A
below
1PST ON
ON
ON
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
OFF
NONE
A3
4
5
0.562 (14.27) 1.000 (25.40) MS25125-C2
MS25125-E2
MS25125-J4
8857K47
8857K48
8857K49
See A
below
1PDT ON
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
ON
ON
ON
B2
3
4
0.562 (14.27) 1.000 (25.40) MS25125-B1
MS25125-C3
MS25125-E3
8857K40
8857K45
8857K44
Tw o - Po l e
See B
below
2PDT ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
NONE
ON
ON
ON
C1
2
4
0.562 (14.27) 1.000 (25.40) MS25126-A1
MS25126-B1
MS25126-E3
8858K39
8858K40
8858K44
Four-Pole
See C
below
4PDT ON NONE ON F 4 0.562 (14.27) 1.000 (25.40) MS25127-E3 8859K44
Switch
Type of
Operation
Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole
28 Vdc 115 Vac, 60 Hz 115 Vac, 400 Hz
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
A
B
C
MS25125
MS25126
MS25127
Maintained
Maintained
Maintained
5
7
5
20
20
20
15
15
15
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3
4
4
10
20
20
10
15
15
Locked in Three
Positions
Style 1 Style 2 Style 3 Style 4 Style 5
Locked in
Center Positions
Locked in
Keyway Side
Locked out of
Center Position
Locked in Center
and Side Opposite
Keyway
V11-T4-6 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.2
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
Military Purpose Toggles
AC Rated (Heavy Duty) Military with Unsealed Lever
Current Ratings
Technical Data and Specifications
Military Purpose Switches
Circuit with Toggle in …
Base
Circuit
See
Page V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length
“A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length
“B”
Inches (mm)
Solder Lug
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Screw
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Current
Ratings
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Poles
and
Throw
Single-Pole
See A below
See B below
1PST ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
MOM. OFF
MOM. ON
A 0.468 (11.89) 0.688 (17.45) 7300K38
7304K38
7303K38
7300K36
7304K36
7303K36
See A below
See B below
1PDT ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
B 0.468 (11.89) 0.688 (17.45) 7301K38
7302K38
7307K38
7306K38
7305K38
7301K36
7302K36
7307K36
7306K36
7305K36
Tw o - Po l e
See C below
See D below
2PST ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
MOM. OFF
MOM. ON
C 0.468 (11.89) 0.688 (17.45) 7310K38
7314K38
7313K38
7310K36
7314K36
7313K36
See C below
See D below
2PDT ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
D 0.468 (11.89) 0.688 (17.45) 7311K38
7312K38
7317K38
7316K38
7315K38
7311K36
7312K36
7317K36
7316K36
7315K36
Type of
Operation
Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole
30 Vdc 125 Vac, 60 Hz 250 Vac, 60 Hz
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load Horsepower
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load Horsepower
Single-Pole
A
B
Maintained
Momentary
5
4
20
15
15
10
15
15
—
—
—
—
6
6
—
—
—
—
Tw o - Po l e
C
D
Maintained
Momentary
7
5
30
20
15
10
25
15
—
—
—
—
9
6
—
—
—
—
Description Specification
Ratings See Product Selection tables
Circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT, 1P3T (ON-ON-ON), 4PST and 4PDT; maintained and momentary action
Contact action Heavy duty—Slow-make/slow-break butt contact
Medium duty—Quick-make/quick-break, wiping action
Contact material Heavy duty:
Movable—silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Stationary—copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Medium duty:
Movable—copper silver-plated
Stationary—bronze silver-plated
Terminal types Heavy duty MIL-S-83731 types:
Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #6-32 x 6.35 mm (0.250 in) pan head (Catalog Number 11-1893) screws and Si bronze #6 helical lockwasher (Catalog Number
16-1096). Furnished unassembled. Terminal screws are tin dipped to facilitate soldering if required
Heavy duty JAN-S-23 types:
Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #6-32 x 4.78 mm (0.188 in) binding head (Catalog Number 811-2) screws. Furnished unassembled
Solder lug terminals—tintillate plated brass
Medium duty MIL-S-83731 types:
Solder lugs—brass silver-plated furnished with 0.094 in (2.39 mm) dia. hole
Base material Thermoset molding material
Mounting means Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/inch
Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep; provides anti-rotation feature
Hardware supplied:
MIL-S-83731 types— 2 hexagon facenuts (Catalog Number 15-966-6), 1 locking ring (Catalog Number 29-761) and 1 internal tooth lockwasher (Catalog Number 16-886).
Furnished unassembled
JAN-S-23 types—2 hexagon facenuts (Catalog Number 15-966-6). Furnished unassembled
Dielectric 1000V minimum
Operating temperature
range
0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-7
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.2
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
Military Purpose Toggles
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
AC/DC Rated (Medium Duty) MIL-83731 Switches
1PDT Maintained Action (Solder Lug) 2PDT Maintained Action (Solder Lug)
AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-83731 Switches with Lever Seal
Single-Pole Maintained and Momentary Action
Two-Pole Momentary Action and 3 ON Circuits
Two-Pole Maintained Action
Four-Pole Maintained and Momentary Action
15/32−32NS−2A
0.687
(17.45)
0.680
(17.27)
0.070
(1.78)
1.250
(31.75)
0.080 (2.03) Dia. End Terminal
0.041
(1.01)
123
(Ref.)
0.090 (2.29) Dia. Center Terminal
0.468
(11.89)
Dim. A
0.937
(23.80)
Dim. B
0.906
(23.01)
14˚
14˚
123(Ref.)
456(Ref.)
15/32−32NS−2A
0.687
(17.45)
0.680
(17.27)
0.070
(1.78)
1.250
(31.75)
0.080 (2.03) Dia. End Terminal
0.041
(1.01)
0.090 (2.29) Dia. Center Terminal
0.468
(11.89)
Dim. A
0.937
(23.80)
Dim. B
0.906
(23.01)
14˚
14˚
15/32-32 Thds.
#6-32 x 0.180 (4.57)
Long Pan Head Screws
A
B
1.040
(26.42)
1.12 0
(28.45)
0.620
(15.75)
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
0.750
(19.05)
1.310
(33.27)
15/32−32 Thds.
1.200
(30.48)
#6−32 x 0.250 (6.35)
Pan Head Screws
B
A
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
15/32-32 Thds.
#6-32 x 0.250 (6.35)
Long Pan Head Screws
A
B
1.060
(26.92)
1.310
(33.27)
0.750
(19.05)
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
1.430
(36.32)
1.320
(33.53)
15/32−32 Thds.
1.250
(31.75)
#6−32 x 0.250 (6.35)
Long Pan Head Screws
B
A
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
V11-T4-8 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.2
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
Military Purpose Toggles
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-83731 Lever Lock Switches
with Lever Seal
Single-Pole
Tw o - P o l e
Four-Pole
AC Rated (Heavy Duty)
1PDT Maintained Action
2PDT Maintained Action
2PDT Momentary Action
15/32-32 Thds.
#6-32 Screws
A
B
1.12 0
(28.45)
1.140
(28.96)
0.620
(15.75)
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
15/32-32 Thds.
#6-32 Screws
A
B
1.250
(31.75)
1.310
(33.27)
0.900
(22.86)
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
15/32-32 Thds.
#6-32 Screws
A
B
1.310
(33.27)
1.310
(33.27)
1.590
(40.39)
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide
15/32-32 Thds.
B
A
1.120
(28.45)
15/32
Dia.
1.040
(26.42)
0.620
(15.75)
28˚
14˚
60˚
Keyway
0.030−0.040 D x 0.060−0.070 W
(0.76−1.02 D x 1.52−1.78 W)
#6-32 x 0.180 (4.57)
Long Binding Head Screw
0.180 (4.57)
B
A
0.270 (6.86)
0.040
(1.02)
0.760
(19.30)
0.030
(0.76)
Ref.
0.750
(19.05)
28˚
14˚
Keyway
0.030−0.040 D x 0.060−0.070 W
(0.76−1.02 D x 1.52−1.78 W)
0.300
(7.62)
B
A
0.910
(23.11)
0.030
(0.76)
Ref.
0.750
(19.05)
0.800
(20.32)
36˚
18˚
Keyway
0.030−0.040 D x 0.060−0.070 W
(0.76−1.02 D x 1.52−1.78 W)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-9
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.3
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Contents
Description Page
Illuminated AC Rated Switches
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-10
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-10
Product Description
These illuminated toggles
are available only in single-
pole circuitry. A two-pole
base is utilized with single-
pole housing the lamp. On
single-throw circuits, the
lamp is wired to operate in
conjunction with the switch.
On double-throw circuits, the
lamp is independent of the
switch. On the sealed
versions, a silicone rubber
seal is fitted to the paddle
lever to provide a moisture-
and dust-resistant seal
between the lever and
bushing.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
7 0 7 1 K 2 1
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in …
Base
Catalog
Number
Circuit
Number
See
Page
V11-T4-35
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Standard
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1PST ON NONE OFF 7071K21 G
Sealed
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1PST ON NONE OFF 7073K21 G
1PDT ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
ON
MOM. ON
7073K20
7073K25
H
Example:
Lever Color
G = Green
T =Red
A = Amber
Code letters and/or numbers—
add to base circuit number.
Terminal Type
52 = 0.250 in spade
G 1 5 2
Bulb Voltage
1 = 14V
V11-T4-10 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.3
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Technical Data and Specifications
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Illuminated
Description Specification
Ratings See Catalog Number Selection
Circuits 1PST and 1PDT; maintained and momentary action
Contact material Movable—silver-plated copper
Stationary—silver-plated copper
Terminal types Spade—brass
Base material Colored thermoplastic paddle lever
28˚
0.270
(6.86)
0.650
(16.51)
0.910
(23.11) 1.430
(36.32)
1.310
(33.27)
0.750
(19.05)
0.030 (0.76)
0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
0.080 (2.03)
Deep x
0.440 (11.18)
“A” Dim.
Keyway
0.070 (1.78)
0.210 (5.33) Dia.
0.470
(11.94)
0.030 (0.76) Ref.
0.030 (0.76)
1.310 (33.27)
0.250 (6.35)
A
14˚
Wide
Quick Connect
Type
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-11
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
General Purpose Toggles
Contents
Description Page
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-16
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-16
Product Description
These AC rated toggle
switches offer the widest
selection of features and the
design flexibility to meet a
variety of applications.
Features
The optional features shown
below may not be available
on all toggle models. Contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900
Series
●3-independent ON Circuit
(2PDT or 4PDT only, see
Page V11-T4-14)
●Short (11/32 in) bushing
●Tall (15/32 in) bushing
●White nylon designer
lever, see Dimensions
on Page V11-T4-16
●Black nylon designer
lever, see Dimensions
on Page V11-T4-16
●Hardware—
furnished assembled
●Reversing jumpers (not for
use with 3-independent
ON circuit)
●Short (15/32 in) bat lever
●Tall (11/16 in) bat lever
(not available with short
bushing)
●Rotate keyway 180°
●Lever seal
●Omit one pole (2P, 3P,
4P only. Not for use
with 3-independent
ON circuit)
7800 Series Only
●3-independent ON circuit
(2PDT or 4PDT only, see
Page V11-T4-14)
●Hardware—
furnished assembled
●Reversing jumpers (Not for
use with 3-independent
ON circuit)
●Rotate keyway 180°
●Silicone lever seal
(1P and 2P only)
●Omit one pole (2P, 3P,
4P only. Not for use
with 3-independent
ON circuit)
Options
Combi-Term Option
This is an extension of our AC
rated general purpose toggle
switch. The “Combi-Term”
design allows the user the
option of screw terminals,
0.25 in quick connects or
solder termination all on the
same switch. The special
clips and screws are provided
in a poly bag with the switch.
Circuits
●1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT,
3PST, 3PDT, 4PST and
4PDT
●Maintained and
momentary
Standards and
Certifications
●UL® Recognized
●CSA® Certified
(except as noted)
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
V11-T4-12 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Product Selection
AC Rated Toggle Switches—Single-Pole
Notes
1 Also 4.2A L at 125 Vac rating.
2 Single-pole switch in two-pole base.
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in …
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
1PST ON NONE OFF A 0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
0.563 (14.30)
7580K7
7580K6
7580K5
7580K4
7580K9
7580K8
1PDT ON OFF ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7581K6 7581K4 7581K8
1PDT ON NONE ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7582K6 7582K4 7582K8
1PDT ON
MOM. ON
NONE
OFF
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7585K6
7587K6
7585K4
7587K4
7585K8
7587K8
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
1PST OFF NONE MOM. ON A 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7506K3 7506K4 7506K6
1PST OFF NONE MOM. ON A 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7506K38 7506K36 7506K40
1PDT MOM. ON
ON
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7509K4
7510K6
7509K5
7510K7
7509K7
7510K9
1PDT ON
MOM. ON
OFF
OFF
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
B 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7508K38
7509K38
7508K36
7509K36
7508K40
7509K40
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125V Vac
1PST ON NONE OFF A 0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
0.563 (14.30)
7501K12
7501K13
7500K13 1
7500K14 1
7501K14
7501K15
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1PDT ON OFF ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7503K13 17502K13 7503K15
1PDT ON NONE ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7505K4 7504K4
17505K6
20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1PST ON NONE OFF A 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7546K38 7546K36 7546K40
30A, 125 Vac
25A, 250 Vac 2
1PST ON NONE OFF A 0.344 (8.74) 0.563 (14.30) — 7576K2 —
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-13
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
AC Rated Toggle Switches—Two-Pole
Notes
1 Also 1/2 hp at 125–250 Vac Rating.
2 Not CSA Certified.
3 Also 7.5A, 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 120–240–277 Vac.
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in …
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
Combi-
Term
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
2A, 277 Vac
2.5A, L at 125 Vac
2PST ON NONE OFF C 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7590K6 7590K4 7590K8 —
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
2.5A, L at 125 Vac
2PDT ON OFF ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7591K6 7591K4 7591K8 —
2PDT ON NONE ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7592K6 7592K4 7592K8 —
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
2PDT MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7597K6 7597K4 7597K8 —
2PDT ON ON OFF 7530 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7530K1 7530K3 7530K2 —
10A 250 Vac,
15A 125 Vac, 1/4 hp
125–250 Vac
2PDT ON ON ON 7555 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7555K12 7555K11 7555K13 —
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
2PST ON NONE OFF C 0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
0.563 (14.30)
7561K5
7561K4
7560K6
7560K5
7561K7
7561K6
—
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac
2PDT ON OFF ON D 0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.563 (14.30)
0.563 (14.30)
7563K5
7563K4
7562K5
7562K4
7563K7
7563K6
—
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
2PDT ON NONE ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7565K5 7564K6 7565K7 —
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
2PST OFF NONE MOM. ON C 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7566K4 7566K5 7566K7 —
2PDT ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7568K3 1
7569K1
7570K4
7568K2 1
7569K2
7570K5
7568K4 1
7569K3
7570K7
—
—
—
2PDT MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7569K38 7569K36 7569K40 —
20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
2PST ON NONE OFF C 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7630K38 7630K36 7630K40 —
2PDT ON NONE ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7632K38 7632K36 7632K40 —
Section A
10A 250 Vac;
15A 125 Vac,
3/4 hp 250 Vac,
4.2A L 125 Vac;
Section B
10A 250 Vac,
15A 125 Vac,
1/4 hp 250 Vac
2PDT OFF 1 ON 2 ON 7571 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7571K2 7571K4 7571K6 —
20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 120–240 Vac
2PST ON NONE OFF C 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7803K11 7803K31 7803K21 27803K41
2PDT ON
ON
MOM. ON
OFF
NONE
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
D 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7803K12
7803K13
7803K17 2
7803K32
7803K33
7803K37 2
7803K22 3
7803K23 3
7803K27 2
7803K42
7803K43
7803K47
2
V11-T4-14 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
AC Rated Toggle Switches—Three-Pole
AC Rated Toggle Switches—Four-Pole
Notes
1 Also 1/2 hp at 125–250 Vac Rating.
2 Not CSA Certified.
3 Also 7.5A, 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 120–240–277 Vac.
4 1 hp at 240–480 Vac single- or two-phase and 240–600 Vac three-phase.
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in …
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
Combi-
Term
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1 hp, 3 Ph
125–600 Vac
1 hp, 1 and 2 Ph
125–480 Vac
3PST ON NONE OFF E 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7700K1 7700K2 7700K3 —
3PDT ON
ON
OFF
NONE
ON
ON
F 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7701K1
7702K1
7701K2
7702K2
7701K3
7702K3
—
—
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
3PDT MOM. ON
MOM. ON
OFF
NONE
ON
ON
F 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7704K1
7705K1
7704K2
7705K2
7704K3
7705K3
—
—
20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 120 Vac
1, 2 and 3 Ph
3PDT ON OFF ON F 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7804K12
24
7804K32 27804K22 27804K42 2
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in …
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
Combi-
Term
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
4PST ON NONE OFF E 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7691K14 7690K8 — —
4PDT ON
ON
OFF
NONE
ON
ON
F 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7693K2
7695K5
7692K13
7694K4
—
—
—
—
20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
4PST ON NONE OFF E 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7933K38 7933K36 7933K40 —
4PDT ON
ON
OFF
NONE
ON
ON
F 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7934K38
7935K38
7934K36
7935K36
7934K40
7935K40
—
—
20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 125–240 Vac
2 and 3 Ph
4PDT ON OFF ON F 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7805K12 27805K32 27805K22 27805K42 2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-15
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
AC Rated Sealed 1 Toggle Switches—Single-Pole
AC Rated Sealed 1 Toggle Switches—Two-Pole
AC Rated Special Circuit Toggle Switches—Two-Pole
Notes
1Seal is lever seal only and is dust and splash resistant. Panel seal is available, Part Number 32-341.
2Also 1/2 hp at 125–250 Vac Rating.
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in …
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
1PST OFF NONE MOM. ON A 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) — 7506K20 7506K21
1PDT MOM. ON
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
OFF
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) —
—
—
7509K20
7510K20
7508K20
7509K21
7510K21
7508K21
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125V–250 Vac
1PST ON NONE OFF A 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7501K22 7500K20
27501K21
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1PDT ON OFF ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) — 7502K20 7503K21
1PDT ON NONE ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) — 7504K20 27505K21
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in …
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
2PST ON NONE OFF C 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) — 7560K20 7561K21
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac
2PDT ON OFF ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) — 7562K20 7563K21
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
2PDT ON NONE ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) — 7564K20 7565K21
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
2PST OFF NONE MOM. ON C 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) — 7566K20 7566K21
2PDT ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) —
—
—
7568K20 2
7569K20
7570K20
7568K21 2
7569K21
7570K21
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in …
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac
2PDT 2-3, 5-6 OFF 2-6, 5-3 D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7563K24 7562K23 7563K25
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
2PDT 2-3, 5-6 NONE 2-6, 5-3 D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7565K24 7564K23 7565K25
V11-T4-16 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Technical Data and Specifications
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Contact Material
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series
1PST Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals) 1PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals)
Description Specification
Ratings See Product Selection tables; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
Contact mechanism Slow-make/slow-brake butt contact
Terminal types Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #6-32x 3/16 binding head (Cat. No. 811-2) screws
Furnished unassembled
Solder lug terminals—tintillate-plated brass
Spade terminals—combi-term—brass
Base material Thermoset molding material
Mounting means Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/in
Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep, provides anti-rotation feature
Hardware supplied—1 hexagon locknut (Cat. No. 15-192) and 1 bright nickel-plated knurled facenut
(Cat. No. 15-124F1), except 7700–7705, which have bright nickel hexagon facenut (Cat. No. 15-966-2)
Furnished unassembled
Finish Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing
Dielectric withstand 1000V rms minimum
Operating temperature
range
0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)
Ampere Movable Stationary
7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series Switches
3 to 6 Silver-plated copper Silver-plated copper
10 to 20 Silver-plated copper with silver buttons Silver-plated copper with silver buttons
20 to 30 Silver-plated copper with cad oxide buttons Copper with cad oxide buttons
7800 Series Switches
3 to 6 Silver-plated copper Silver-plated copper
10 to 20 Copper with silver buttons Copper with silver buttons
0.469
(11.91)
0.625
(15.87)
0.300
(7.62)
1.218
(30.93)
1.047
(26.59)
A
B
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
1.12 5
(28.57)
0.625
(15.87)
0.469
(11.91)
0.440
(11.17)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
1.10 0
(27.95)
A
B
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-17
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series, continued
2PDT Maintained (Solder Lugs)
1PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs)
2PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)
2PDT Maintained (Spade Terminals)
2PDT Momentary (Screw Terminals)
2PDT Momentary (Spade Terminals)
1.031
(26.18)
B
A
0.270
(6.85)
0.469
(11.91)
1.312
(33.32)
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
0.750 (19.05)
0.740 (18.79)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
14°
28°
0.469
(11.91)
0.625
(15.87)
0.270
(6.86)
1.125
(28.57)
1.047
(26.59)
A
B
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
0.797
(20.24)
0.750 (19.05)
0.740 (18.79) 1.312
(33.32)
0.469
(11.91)
0.300
(7.62)
1.062
(26.97)
A
B
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
14°
28°
1.312
(33.32)
0.469
(11.91)
0.750
(19.05)
0.440
(11.17)
1.200
(30.48)
A
B
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
14°
28°
1.312
(33.32)
0.750
(19.05)
0.797
(20.24)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref. 0.300
(7.62)
0.910
(23.11)
0.469
(11.91)
0.562
(14.27)
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
18°
36°
1.312
(33.32)
0.750
(19.05)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
0.440
(11.18)
0.910
(23.11)
0.469
(11.91)
0.562
(14.27)
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
18°
36°
V11-T4-18 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series, continued
3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs)
2PDT Momentary (Solder Lugs)
3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals)
3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals)
4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals)
4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs)
4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals)
0.688
(17.47)
0.965
(24.51)
1.437
(36.49)
0.469
(11.91)
0.270
(6.85)
1.333 (33.85)
Max.
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
15.5°
31°
1.312
(33.32)
0.750
(19.05)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref. 0.270
(6.85)
0.910
(23.11)
0.469
(11.91)
0.562
(14.27)
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
18°
36°
0.688
(17.47)
0.965
(24.51)
0.469
(11.91) 1.437
(36.49)
0.300 (7.62)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
1.333 (33.85)
Max.
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
15.5°
31°
0.688
(17.47)
0.965
(24.51)
1.437
(36.49)
0.469
(11.91)
0.440
(11.17)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
1.333 (33.85)
Max.
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
15.5°
31°
1.437
(36.49)
1.546
(39.26)
1.333 (33.85)
Max.
0.300
(7.62)
0.469 (11.91)
1.265
(32.13)
0.688
(17.47)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
1.437
(36.49)
1.546
(39.26)
1.333 (33.85)
Max.
0.270
(6.85)
0.469
(11.91)
1.225
(31.11)
0.688
(17.47)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
1.437
(36.49)
1.546
(39.26)
1.333 (33.85)
Max.
0.469 (11.91)
0.440 (11.17)
1.405
(35.68)
0.688
(17.47)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-19
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.4
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
7800 Series
2PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)
2PDT Maintained (Combi-Terminals)
3PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)
4PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)
3PDT Maintained (0.25 in Spade Terminals)
Combi-Term Termination Options
15/32-32
(11.91 TPI)
0.750
(19.05)
1.312
(33.32)
0.234
(5.94)
0.812
(20.62)
0.671
(17.04)
0.469
(11.91)
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
0.750
(19.05)
1.312
(33.32)
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
15/32-32
(11.91 TPI)
0.812
(20.62)
0.671
(17.04)
0.469
(11.91)
0.375
(9.53)
0.687
(17.45)
0.469
(11.91)
0.812
(20.62)
0.218
(5.54)
1.296 (32.92) 1.437 (36.50)
0.469 (11.91) TPI
(15/32−32)
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
0.687
(17.45)
0.469
(11.91)
0.812
(20.62)
0.234
(5.54)
1.296 (32.92) 1.437 (36.50)
0.469 (11.91) TPI
(15/32−32)
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
1.437 (36.50)
0.687
(17.45)
0.469
(11.91)
0.812
(20.62)
1.296 (32.92)
0.469 (11.91) TPI
(15/32−32)
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
0.440
(11.17)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.
Solder Quick Connect Screw
V11-T4-20 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.5
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
General Purpose Toggles
Contents
Description Page
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-21
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-21
Product Description
This line of switches employs
a quick-make/quick-break
contact mechanism. The
resultant high-speed
movement eliminates the
“teasing” of the switch and
reduces the pitting of the
contact surfaces due to
arcing. Self-cleaning and
wiping contact action assures
positive contact on switch
operation. These switches
are especially suited for use
in small motor applications.
Options
●Lever—11/16 in
●Lever seal
●Mounting hardware;
furnished assembled
●Other lead lengths
Standards and
Certifications
●UL Recognized
●CSA Certified
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
Product Selection
AC/DC Rated Toggle Switches—Single-Pole
AC/DC Rated Toggle Switches—Two-Pole
Note
1 Rating: 6A, 125 Vac/Vdc and 3A, 250 Vdc.
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in … Base Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
Wire
Leads
3A, 250 Vdc 1PST ON NONE OFF A 0.344 (8.74) 0.500 (12.70) 8280K115 8295K107 8290K115
6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vdc
1PST ON
ON
MOM. ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
OFF
A 0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.469 (11.91)
0.500 (12.70)
0.500 (12.70)
0.500 (12.70)
8381K107
8381K108
8928K478
8396K107
8396K108
—
8391K107
8391K108
—
1PDT ON NONE ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.500 (12.70) 8928K479 — —
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in … Base Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
Solder
Lugs
Screw
Terminals
Wire
Leads
7A, 125V
3A, 250 Vdc
2PST ON
MOM. ON
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF
C 0.469 (11.91)
0.469 (11.91)
0.500 (12.70)
0.500 (12.70)
8370K107
8928K481 1
8372K107
8928K482 1
8371K107
—
2PDT ON
ON
NONE
NONE
ON
ON
D 0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.500 (12.70)
0.500 (12.70)
8373K108
8373K107
8375K108
8375K107
8374K108
8374K107
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-21
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.5
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
Technical Data and Specifications
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8280K115
1PST Maintained
(Solder Lug)
8290K115
1PST Maintained
(Wire Lead)
8295K107
1PST Maintained
(Screw Terminals)
8381K107 and K108
1PST Maintained
(Solder Lug)
Description Specification
Ratings See Product Selection table; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
Circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT
Maintained and momentary toggle action
Contact mechanism Quick-make/quick-break wiping action
Contact material Bronze silver-plated
Terminal types Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #5-40 x 5/32 in (Cat. No. 11-26) screws
Furnished unassembled
Solder lug terminals—brass silver-plated with 0.085–0.090 in (2.16–2.29 mm) dia. hole
Integrated wire leads—18 gauge, 6 in long and skinned 3/4 in
Special wire leads lengths beyond 6 in are available at additional charge
Base material Thermoset molding material
Mounting means Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/inch
Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x.89 mm) deep, provides anti-rotation feature
Hardware supplied—1 hexagon locknut (Cat. No. 15-192) and 1 bright nickel-plated knurled
facenut (Cat. No. 15-124F1)
Furnished unassembled
Finish Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing
Operating temperature range 0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)
0.500
(12.70)
1.0 0 0
(25.40)
0.245 (6.22)
0.239 (6.07)
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds. A
BC
0.090 (2.28)
0.085 (2.15)
Dia. Hole
0.200
(5.08)
0.968
(24.60)
Dia.
D
0.532
(13.51)
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
0.562
(14.28)
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.411
(35.84)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
1.0 0 0
(25.40)
0.245 (6.22)
0.239 (6.07)
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds. A
BC
Standard 6.000 (152.40)
Long Wire Leads
0.968
(24.60)
0.046
(1.19)
Dia.
D
0.562
(14.28)
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.406
(35.71)
29-1/2°
0.245 (6.22)
0.239 (6.07)
A
C
D
B
(31.75)
1.250
#5/40 x 5/32 Lg.
Binding Head Screw
0.500
(12.70)
1.0 0 0
(25.40)
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
0.968
(24.60)
Dia.
0.562
(14.28)
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
0.046
(1.19)
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.406
(35.71)
29-1/2°
0.671
(17.06)
1.093
(27.78)
A
B
C
0.203
(5.15)
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
D
0.687
(17.46)
0.245 (6.22)
0.239 (6.07) Dia.
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
0.090 (2.28)
0.085 (2.15)
Dia. Hole
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.531
(38.89)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.656
(42.06)
25-1/2°
V11-T4-22 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.5
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8391K107 and K108
1PST Maintained
(Wire Lead)
8396K107 and K108
1PST Maintained
(Screw Terminals)
8928K478
1PST Momentary
(Solder Lug)
0.240 (6.09)
(27.78)
1.093
0.664
(16.86)
A
BC
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
Standard
6.000 (152.40)
Long Wire Leads
D
0.685
(17.39)
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.531
(38.89)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.656
(42.06)
25-1/2°
#5/40 x 5/32 Lg.
Binding Head Screw
(27.78)
1.093
0.671
(17.06)
1.390
(35.32)
A
BC
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
D
0.687
(17.46)
0.245 (6.22)
0.239 (6.07) Dia.
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.531
(38.89)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.656
(42.06)
25-1/2°
0.242 (6.14) Dia.
0.690
(17.52)
1.15 6
(29.36)
A
B
C
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
0.085 (2.15)
Dia. Hole
D
0.950
(24.13)
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.980
(50.29)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.656
(42.06)
25-1/2°
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-23
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.5
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
8370 and 8373K107 and
K108
2PST/2PDT Maintained
(Solder Lug)
8371 and 8374K107 and
K108
1PST Maintained
(Wire Lead)
8373 and 8375K107 and
K108
2PST/2PDT Maintained
(Screw Terminals)
0.687
(17.46)
A
C
D
15/32 Dia.-
32 Thds.
Two Solder Lugs
Omitted for
Single-Throw
0.873 (22.17)
0.830 (21.08)
B
0.245 (6.22)
0.239 (6.07) Dia.
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
1.156
(29.36)
0.090 (2.28)
0.085 (2.15)
Dia. Hole
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.694
(43.03)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.820
(46.23)
25-1/2°
1.000 (25.40)
0.687
(17.46)
1.15 6
(29.36)
A
BC
Single-Throw
Double-Throw 0.281
(7.14)
1.080 (27.43)
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
D
0.640
(16.27)
0.245 (6.22)
0.239 (6.07) Dia.
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.484
(37.69)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.515
(38.48)
25-1/2°
#5/40 x 5/32 Lg.
Binding Head Screw
0.687
(17.46)
1.15 6
(29.37)
1.656 (42.07)
A
BC
1.093
(27.78) 0.343
(8.73)
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.
D
These Terminals Omitted on
Single-Throw Switches
0.640
(16.27)
0.245 (6.22)
0.239 (6.07) Dia.
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
“A”
Lever
Dim.
“B”
Bushing
Dim.
“C”
Overall
Dim.
“D”
Throw
Dim.
0.500
(12.70)
0.344
(8.74)
1.484
(37.69)
29-1/2°
0.500
(12.70)
0.469
(11.91)
1.609
(40.87)
25-1/2°
V11-T4-24 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.6
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
X Series Toggles
X Series Toggles
Contents
Description Page
X Series Toggles
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-25
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-25
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-25
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-26
Product Description
Eaton’s new, competitively
priced, AC rated X Series
toggles offer a standard high
rating for both single- and
two-pole applications. The
new X Series toggle line
offers a wide range of
switching circuits, functions
and accessories. Ratings for
single- and two-pole include
20A at 125 Vac and 10A at
277 Vac to handle more
severe inductive, motor and
lamp loads.
In addition, X Series toggles
have a high standard horse-
power rating of 1-1/2 hp,
125–250 Vac for two-pole
applications.
The easy-to-install toggles
also have an industry-
standard 0.48 in diameter
mounting hole. For added
convenience and delivery
support, select industry-
standard switch circuit part
numbers are available from
stock. With so many
features, X Series toggles
can be used in a variety of
applications.
Application Description
●Commercial and industrial
equipment
●Household appliances
●Industrial machinery and
automation
●Medical equipment
●Military communications
and surveillance
●Rail systems
●Signaling and
communications
●Test and lab equipment
●Telecommunications, cable
and broadcasting
Standards and
Certifications
●UL Recognized component
for Canada File E2702
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-25
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.6
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
X Series Toggles
Product Selection
Single-Pole 1
Tw o - P o l e 4
Notes
1 Ratings: 20A at 125 Vac, 10A at 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac; recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc.
2 Keyway position.
3 Indicates momentary position.
4 Ratings: 20A at 125 Vac, 10A at 277 Vac, 1-1/2 hp, 125–250 Vac; recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc.
Accessories
See Accessories on Page V11-T4-31.
Technical Data and Specifications
X Series Toggles
Poles and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position 2
Terminal Type—Catalog Number
0.250 in Spade Screw Solder Lugs
1PST ON NONE OFF XTD1A1A2 XTD1A2A2 XTD1A3A2
1PST ON 3NONE OFF XTD1F1A2 XTD1F2A2 XTD1F3A2
1PDT ON OFF ON XTD2B1A XTD2B2A XTD2B3A
1PDT ON NONE ON XTD2C1A XTD2C2A XTD2C3A
1PDT ON NONE ON 3XTD2D1A XTD2D2A XTD2D3A
1PDT ON 3OFF ON 3XTD2E1A XTD2E2A XTD2E3A
1PDT ON OFF ON 3XTD2G1A XTD2G2A XTD2G3A
Poles and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position 2
Terminal Type—Catalog Number
0.250 in Spade Screw Solder Lugs
2PST ON NONE OFF XTD3A1A2 XTD3A2A2 XTD3A3A2
2PST ON 3NONE OFF XTD3F1A2 XTD3F2A2 XTD3F3A2
2PDT ON OFF ON XTD4B1A XTD4B2A XTD4B3A
2PDT ON NONE ON XTD4C1A XTD4C2A XTD4C3A
2PDT ON NONE ON 3XTD4D1A XTD4D2A XTD4D3A
2PDT ON 3OFF ON 3XTD4E1A XTD4E2A XTD4E3A
2PDT ON OFF ON 3XTD4G1A XTD4G2A XTD4G3A
Description Specification
Single-pole rating 20A, 125 Vac; 10A, 277 Vac; 3/4 hp 125–250 Vac; Recommended up to 15A at 28Vdc
Two-pole rating 20A, 125 Vac; 10A, 277 Vac; 1-1/2 hp 125–250 Vac; Recommended up to 15A at 28Vdc
Available circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT
Terminal types Brass screw, brass solder lugs, brass nickel-plated 0.250 in spade
Hardware included Zinc nickel-plated knurl nut, zinc nickel-plated hex nut
Mounting means Threaded bushing 12.0 +0.1, –0 mm; 16.5 +1, –1 mm
Keyway 1.8 mm located in DOWN position
Base material Thermoset molding material
Finish Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing
Contact mechanism Slow-make/slow-break butt contact
Contact resistance 50 ohm maximum
Dielectric strength AC 1500V, 1 minute
Operating temperature 32° to 149°F (0° to 65°C)
Insulation resistance DC 500V 100M ohm minute
Seal level rating IP40
Packaging Sealed in polybag labeled with part number
V11-T4-26 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.6
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
X Series Toggles
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Single-Pole Two-Pole
A0.649 ± 0.039
(16.50 ± 1.00)
B0.468 ± 0.012
(11.90 ± 0.30)
C0.677 ± 0.019
(17.20 ± 0.50)
D0.452 ± 0.019
(11.50 ± 0.50)
0.629 ± 0.012
(16.00 ± 0.30)
Keyway
1.125 ± 0.012
(28.60 ± 0.30)
ø0.236 ± 0.012
(ø6.0 ± 0.30)
A
B
C
D
15/32-32 NS-2A
A0.649 ± 0.039
(16.50 ± 1.00)
B0.468 ± 0.012
(11.90 ± 0.30)
C0.740 ± 0.019
(18.80 ± 0.50)
D0.452 ± 0.019
(11.50 ± 0.50)
Keyway
ø0.236 ± 0.007
(ø6.00 ± 0.20)
0.748 ± 0.019
(19.00 ± 0.50)
1.299 ± 0.019
(33.00 ± 0.50)
15/32-32 NS-2A
Mounting Hole
ø0.472 +0.003/–0.000
(ø12.00 +0.10/–0.00)
321
654
0.063 ± 0.004
(1.60 ± 0.10)
0.433 ± 0.003
(11.00 ± 0.10)
A
B
C
D
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-27
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.7
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Contents
Description Page
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-28
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-29
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-29
Product Description
One-Hole Panel Mount
These heavy duty toggle
switches are available in
either two- or three-position.
The three-position switches
offer a unique positive center
stop feature, which assures
that the lever cannot be
thrown from one side
through the center OFF
position without stopping.
This design feature is a major
factor in their widespread
acceptance for motor
reversing and speed control
applications.
The most common
application for the switch is to
help prevent motor damage
resulting from the high
current generation by counter
EMF of the armature at the
time of reversing. This type of
device is referred to within
the industry as an anti-
plugging, hesitation, positive
stop or positive off switch.
Typical applications include
bench tools, coach and truck
(electric lift) and X-ray
equipment.
Flush Mount
These three-position
switches also offer the
positive center stop feature
where the lever cannot be
thrown from one side
through the center OFF
position without stopping.
The high ratings of this series
allow it to be used with a
broad range of heavy duty
applications. Copper contacts
and brass screw terminals
are standard.
Standards and
Certifications
●UL Recognized
(except where noted)
●CSA Certified
(where noted)
V11-T4-28 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.7
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Product Selection
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches—One-Hole Panel Mount
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches—Flush Mount
Notes
1 Listed rating for 125 Vac also applies at 28 Vdc.
2 Supplied in a four-pole base.
3 CSA Certified.
4 Also rated 5A, 600 Vac; 1-1/2 hp, 250 Vdc; 2 hp, 240 Vac.
5 Also rated 2 hp, 250 Vac/Vdc.
Rating
Poles
and
Throw 2
Circuit with Toggle in …
Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)
Lever
Type
Catalog Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
Solder
Terminals
Screw
Lugs
0.250 in
Spade
Terminals
15A, 125 Vac 1
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
2PDT ON OFF ON D 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) Bat 7992K11 7992K10 7992K12
15A, 125 Vac 1
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
3PDT ON OFF ON F 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) Bat 7991K11 7991K10 7991K12
15A, 125 Vac 1
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
4PDT ON OFF ON F 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) Bat 7990K11 7990K10 7990K12
Rating
Poles
and
Throw
Circuit with Toggle in …
Lever
Type
Termination
Type
Catalog
Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
20A, 125 Vac/Vdc
10A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2PDT ON
ON
NONE
OFF
ON
ON
Square
Square
Screw
Screw
7810K1
7810K2 34
30A, 125 Vac/Vdc
20A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2PDT ON OFF ON Square Screw 7811K5 35
3PDT ON OFF ON Square Screw 7812K2
4PDT ON OFF ON Square Screw 7813K2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-29
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.7
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Technical Data and Specifications
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
One-Hole Panel Mount
7990K10—4PDT
Description Specification
Ratings See Product Selection tables; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
Circuits 2PDT, 3PDT, 4PDT; maintained action
Contact mechanism
One-hole panel mount AC rated devices—slow-make/Slow-break butt contact
AC/DC rated devices—Quick-make/quick-break wiping contacts
Flush mount Quick-make/quick-break wiping contacts
Contact material
One-hole panel mount AC rated devices:
Movable—silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Stationary—copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
AC/DC rated devices:
Movable—copper
Stationary—bronze
Flush mount Movable—copper
Stationary—copper
Terminal types Screw terminals—brass
Mounting means
One-hole panel mount AC rated devices:
Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/in
Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep, provide anti-rotation feature
Hardware supplied—
1 hexagon locknut (Catalog Number 15-192) and 1 hex facenut (Catalog Number 15-966-6)
Furnished unassembled
Flush mount Flush mounting panel tabs
Dielectric withstand 1000V rms minimum
Operating temperature range 0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)
15/32−32 Thds.
0.430 (10.92)
1.320
(33.53)
1.450 (36.83)
Max.
1.550 (39.37)
Max.
0.470
(11.94)
0.300
(7.62)
0.690
(17.53)
32˚
0.970
(24.64)
6−32 x 0.188 (4.77)
Binding Head Screw
0.070
(1.78)
V11-T4-30 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.7
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Flush Mount
7810K2—2PDT 7811K2—2PDT
7813K2—4PDT
3.781 (96.04)
0.968
(24.59)
1.593
(40.46)
3.781
(96.04)
1.593
(40.46)
3.281 (83.34)
1.312
(33.34)
1.859
(47.22)
2.937
(74.60)
1.812
(46.02)
3.781 (96.04)
3.281 (83.34)
1.312
(33.34)
1.890
(48.01)
2.937
(74.60)
0.406
(10.31)
3.281
(83.34)
3.781 (96.04)
3.281 (83.34)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-31
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.8
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
Accessories
Mounting Hardware
Product Description
One-Hole Mounting Switches
All bushing mounted
switches are furnished with
two mounting nuts. One nut
is mounted behind the panel
to prevent the bushing sleeve
from being distorted if the
front panel is overtightened
Eaton accepts no
responsibility for damage to
switches mounted without
the backup nuts.
Product Selection
Mounting Hardware for One-Hole Mounting Switches—Mounting Nuts 1
Note
1Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only. Minimum ordering quantity on all items is 100.
Size Description Material
Thickness
Dim. “A” in
Inches (mm)
Inside
Diameter
Dim “B” in
Inches (mm)
OD or Dimension
Across Flats
Dim. “C” in
Inches (mm)
Dimension
Across Corners
Dim. “D” in
Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
3/8-27 Hexagon locknut Nickel-plated brass 0.125 (3.18) — 0.562 (14.27) 0.625 (15.88) 15-2526-2
3/8-24 Bright nickel-plated brass — 15-1525-6
11/32-32 Nickel-plated brass 0.063 (1.60) — 0.473 (12.01) 0.531 (13.49) 15-1525-2
15/32-32 Hexagon locknut Zinc-chromate treated 0.075 (1.91) — 0.625 (15.88) — 15-192
Bright nickel-plated brass 0.078 (1.98) — 0.546 (13.87) 0.625 (15.88) 15-2525-58
Zinc-chromate treated 0.188 (4.76) 0.783 (19.89) 1.125 (25.80) — 15-2528-2
Hexagon facenut Nickel-plated brass 0.078 (1.98) — 0.562 (14.27) 0.656 (16.66) 15-966-2
Semi-lustre nickel-plated brass — 19-966-6
Knurled facenut Bright nickel-plated brass 0.066 (1.68) — 0.562 (14.27) — 15-124F1
Black cupric oxide-plated brass — — 15-124F5
Brass nickel-plated brass 0.109 (2.77) — 0.625 (15.88) — 15-90
Chamfered dress nut Bright nickel-plated brass 0.151 (3.84) 0.312 (7.92) 0.687 (17.45) — 15-994-2
Standard knurl nut with shoulder Nickel-plated brass 0.109 (2.77) — 0.593 (15.06) — 15-2534-14
Dress nut Satin chrome-plated brass 0.125 (3.18) — 0.562 (14.27) — 15-2523-4
Black nylon 0.187 (4.75) 0.390 (9.91) 0.640 (16.26) — 15-1048-3
Knurled dress nut Chrome-plated brass 0.187 (4.75) 0.312 (7.92) 0.640 (16.26) — 15-189-5
3/4-32 Hexagon facenut Nickel-plated steel 0.093 (2.36) — 0.937 (23.80) 1.078 (27.38) 15-1043
#8-40 Hexagon locknut with facenut Nickel-plated steel 0.060 (1.52) — 0.245 (6.22) 0.216 (5.49) 15-1047
V11-T4-32 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.8
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
Accessories
Mounting Washers and Locking Ring 1
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mounting Hardware
Note
1Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only.
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Size Description Material
Thickness
Dim. “A”
Inside Diameter
Dim “B”
OD or Dimension
Across Flats
Dim. “C”
Dimension
Across Corners
Dim. “D”
Catalog
Number
For 15/32 bushing Locking ring Zinc-plated steel 0.040 (1.02) 0.475 (12.07) 0.718 (18.24) — 29-761-5
A
0.031
(0.79)
0.475
(12.07)
0.050
(1.27)
0.719 (18.26)
0.109 (2.77)
0.043 (1.09)
0.063 (1.60)
B
C
B
A
C
B
A
C
C
C
A
A
B
A
C
C
C
A
D
A
B
A
B
C0.031
(0.79)
Hexagon Locknuts
or Facenuts Knurled Facenut
Knurled Nut
with Shoulder
Chamfered Dress Nut
Catalog No. 15-994-2
Knurled Dress Nut
Catalog No. 15-189-5
Knurled Dress Nut
Catalog No. 15-1048-3
Dress Nut
Catalog No. 15-2523-4 Plain Washer
Internal Tooth
Lockwasher Locking Ring
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-33
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.8
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
Accessories
Decorator Facenuts
Product Selection 1
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Seal
●Prevents moisture and contaminants from entering panel
enclosure
●Behind panel mounting
●Stainless-steel cup washer ensures proper seating of silicone
rubber seal
●Seal withstands 20 psi water pressure
●Cat. No. 32-341
Dimensions—32-341
Replacement Terminal Screws
Product Selection
Toggle Boot
●Prevents moisture and contaminants from entering lever to
bushing enclosure
●Front panel mounting
●Threaded mounting nut ensures proper assembly of silicon
rubber boot
●Brass nut: 15/32-32 NS-2A
●Black color
Product Selection
Dimensions—15/32-32 NS-2A
Notes
1Decorator facenuts for 15/32 in bushing switches, 15/32-32 thread.
2Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only.
Type Color Catalog Number
Knurled facenuts Bright black
Bright clear
15-1048-3
15-1048-7
Beveled facenuts Bright black
Bright clear
15-1049-3
15-1049-7
0.438 (11.13)
Dia. Hole
0.625
(15.88)
Dia.
0.438 (11.13)
Dia. Hole
0.625
(15.88)
Dia.
0.060
(1.63)
20˚
Catalog Number 15-1048 Catalog Number 15-1049
Dia.
0.072
0.082
0.427
0.432
1/16-Inch Lettering
(located on angular surface) Silicone
Rubber
0.467
0.472
Thickness of brushing
seal is reduced to 0.080
when mounted to panel
Cupwasher
Stainless Steel
0.105
0.120
Dia.
0.670
0.650
Screw Size Catalog Number 2
#5-40 x 1/8 in 11-1117
#5-40 x 5/32 in 11-26
#5-40 x 3/16 in binding head 811-7206
#5-40 x 1/4 in binding head 811-14
#6-32 x 3/16 in binding head 811-2
#6-32 x 1/4 in binding head 811-161
#6-32 x 1/4 in binding head 811-7248
#6-32 x 1/4 in pan head, brass 11-1893
#6-32 x 3/8 in binding head 811-129
#8-32 x 3/16 in binding head 11-1618
#8-32 x 1/4 in 11-1369
#8-32 x 1/4 in 811-408-2
#8-32 x 3/8 in binding head 11-1766
#8-32 x 3/8 in binding head 11-6074-4
#6-32 x 7/32 in binding head 11-6085-2
Mounting Description Color
Catalog
Number
Front panel mounting
Molded in brass mounting nut
(15/32-32 NS-2A) ensures
proper assembly of silicon
rubber boot
Black SW1RY3030
SW1RY3030
0.940 (24.00)
0.660
(16.70)
0.030
(0.80)
0.120 (3.00)
Ø0.330
(Ø8.40)
Inner Thread 15/32-32 NS-2A
Ø0.643
(Ø16.34)
V11-T4-34 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.8
Tog g l e Sw i t c h e s
Accessories
Indicating Plates
Product Selection—Indicating Plates for 15/32-Inch Bushing Mounted Switches
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches
Indicating Plate
Note
1White lettering.
Marking
Keyway Location
Opposite
Keyway
Keyway
Side Material Finish Catalog Number
Keyway on bottom ON OFF 0.032 in steel Plain 30-5632
Statuary bronze 30-5632-3
Burnished nickel 30-5632-4
0.032 in brass Black cupric oxide 130-2899-3
RAD PHO 0.032 in steel Statuary bronze 30-5632-7
Burnished nickel 30-5632-6
RUN START 0.032 in steel Burnished nickel 30-5632-11
HOT COLD 30-5632-15
HI LOW 30-5632-16
ON STOP 30-5632-17
FOR REV 0.032 in steel Burnished nickel 30-2899-2
AUTO TEST 30-2899-6
PUSH START 30-2899-7
RUN TEST 30-2899-9
BLANK BLANK 0.032 in steel Burnished nickel 30-5632-8
Keyway on side ON OFF 0.032 in steel Burnished nickel 30-5632-13
OFF ON 30-2899-8
Keyway on top T B 0.032 in steel Burnished nickel 30-5632-12
OFF ON 30-5632-14
SET RUN 30-2899-10
BLANK RESET 30-2899-12
Keyway on top O I 0.032 in steel Burnished nickel 30-5632-23
IO 30-5632-19
OFF
ON
1
32 11
32
5 Dia.
8
15 Dia.
32 1
1
16
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-35
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.9
Tog g l e Sw itc h e s
Te c hn i c a l D at a
Terminal Identification
When specified on order,
switches will have the terminals
identified as shown in the
illustration at right. Terminal
markings will be ink-stamped on
the side of the switch case and
unused terminal positions will
not be identified.
All views are rear of switch with
keyway or at down as applicable.
Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and
5 and 8 are considered inboard
terminals for single-, two- and
four-pole switches respectively.
All others are considered
outboard.
“Three Independent” ON-ON-ON Circuit Diagram
For switch modified with “Three Independent” ON-ON-ON
special circuit. External jumpers are required. User to connect
wiring per instructions given below.
ON-ON-ON Special Circuit
Circuit Diagrams
Special General Purpose Toggle Circuits
Toggle Circuit Diagrams
Legends
Toggle Switch Legend
Notes
1Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
2Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
3Dependent lamp.
4Independent lamp.
5Two circuit—indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two
circuits being controlled may be independent of each other.
6For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available.
7Available in 1PDT or 2PDT.
Connection Points Single-Pole
Connect common to terminals 2
Connect circuit “A” to terminals 6
Connect circuit “B” to terminals 4
Connect circuit “C” to terminals 1
Circuit with Lever in …
3 ON
Independent
No. of
Poles
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
(Maintained)
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)
1 PDT 1
Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C
Circuit Number Schematic
7530
7571
7555
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Single-
Pole
Two-
Pole
Four-
Pole
123
456
123
456
123
456
B
A
B
A
B
A
Circuit Letter Schematic Circuit Letter Schematic
A
1PST
I
2 Circuit 5
B
1PDT
J
1PST
C
2PST
K
1PDT
D
2PDT
L
2PST
E
4PST 1
M
2PST
F
4PDT 2
N 6
2PDT
G 3
1PST
P
1PDT
H 4
1PDT
Q 7
2 Circuit
Legend Toggle Switch Type
Contact terminal—will make contact with switch lever
Isolated terminal—does not make contact with lever
Center terminal and switch lever
Bulb
Momentary contact
Denotes mechanical contact portion
3
2
36
14
2
3
1
3
2
6
5
2
3
1
5
6
4
4
31
2
3
2
6
5
9
8
12
11
13
24
2
3
1
5
6
4
8
9
7
11
12
10
3
2
4
6
3
2
4
6
B
A
C
C
NC NO
G
H
NONC
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T5-1
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Dimmers and Wipers
Slide Control
Paddle Control
Rotary Wiper
5.1 Paddle and Slide Controls
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-2
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-2
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-3
5.2 Rotary Wipers
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-4
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-4
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-4
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-4
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-4
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-6
V11-T5-2 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.1
Dimmers and Wipers
Paddle and Slide Controls
Paddle and Slide Controls
Contents
Description Page
Paddle and Slide Controls
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-3
Product Description
Eaton’s unique family of
dimmer and wiper controls
are field proven to be the
market’s most dependable
controls. Although originally
designed for the heavy truck
market, applications in
various other types of
vehicles exist. Paddle and
slide versions are available
and both have the look, feel
and durability associated with
our controls. Bezels and
actuators are molded in a soft
matte finish. Illuminated and
non-illuminated versions are
available. Board-mounted
LEDs located behind a laser-
etched panel provide
illumination. Customized light
panel lettering and custom
pad printed bezels are also
available. Both dimmer
and wiper controls are
designed to complement the
NGR family of switches.
Note: Specific frame options are
available that allow product to
mount in NGR gang mount
system. Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative.
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Paddle and Slide Controls
Bezel Print Style 4
Notes
1Amperage ratings for dimmers only.
2Maximum dwell time describes the average time constant for delayed wiper activation.
3Maximum nominal dwell.
4Custom pad print available for bezel or button.
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
D P 2 4 5 C A D G
Control Type
D=Dimmer
W=Wiper
Actuator Type
P=Paddle
S= Slide
Application
Voltage
12 =12V
24 =24V
Amperage Rating
and Voltage 1
3=3A, 24V
4=4A, 12V
5=5A, 24V
6=6A, 12V
8=8A, 12V
10 = 10A, 12V
W= Wiper
Bezel Print
Style
A=Style A
B=Style B
C=Style C
D=Style D
Connector Type
Packard No.
Connector and Leads
Only Detail
A=12020398
B= 12015345
C= 174930-1
D= 12034295
E= Leads only
Dimmer connector
Dimmer and wiper connector
Dimmer connector
Wiper connector
Dimmer only
Circuit Board 2
D=Dimmer
L= 18 sec. 3
S= 10 sec. 3
LED Color
G=Green
Y=Yellow
R=Red
X= Non-
illuminated
Example:
PANEL
Code C
PANEL
B
R
I
G
H
T
D
I
M
Code A Code D
0
1
2
WIPER W
A
S
H
Code B
W
I
P
E
R
O
F
F
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T5-3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.1
Dimmers and Wipers
Paddle and Slide Controls
Technical Data and Specifications
Paddle and Slide Controls
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Paddle Control Slide Control
Description Specification
Ratings (dimmer only) 4, 6, 8, 10A at 14 Vdc
3, 5A at 28 Vdc
Mechanical life 100,000 operations, maximum
Operating temperature range –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
Base material High-grade thermoplastic molding material
Mounting means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel
Mounting hole Rectangular panel cutout: 1.734 x 0.867 in (44.00 x 22.00 mm)
Panel thickness
Paddle 0.030 to 0.190 in (0.762 x 4.80 mm)
Slide 0.030 to 0.080 in (0.762 x 2.03 mm)
Approximate weight 1.5 oz
Lettering to be white.
Lettering style to be
Helvetica Swiff Condensed 14 pt.
1.024
(26.01)
Symbol and lettering to be stamped in white.
“WIPER” and “WASH” lettering style
to be 12 pt. Univers 59.
OFF lettering to be 10 pt. Univers 59.
Custom lettering is also available.
White
Yellow
Blue
Black
1.960
(49.78)
1.332
(33.83)
1.582
(40.18)
0.454
(11.53)
1.019 ± 0.020
(25.88 ± 0.51)
0.214
(5.44)
50° ± 5°
0.100
(2.54)
0.857
(21.79)
2 Places
1.718
(43.64)
WIPER
W
I
P
E
R
W
A
S
H
O
F
F
Terminal Identication:
Positive (+) (blue wire)
Negative (–) (black wire)
Load (yellow wire)
Positive (+) LED light (blue wire)
Washer (white wire) washer only
Negative (–) LED light (black wire)
0.320
(8.13)
0.800
(20.32)
R 0.090 Typ
(R 2.29)
See
Detail A
1.302
(33.07)
0.745
(18.92)
0.778 (19.76)
Travel
1.965
(49.91)
Black
Blue
Yellow
Black
Blue
1.650
(41.91)
Terminal Identication:
Positive (+) (blue wire)
Negative (–) (black wire)
Load (yellow wire)
Positive (+) LED light (blue wire)
Open position
Negative (–) LED light (black wire)
0.448
(11.38)
1.024
(26.01)
R 0.156 Typ
(R 3.96)
0.100
(2.54)
2.680
(68.07)
1.663
(42.24)
1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.127)
Panel Opening
0.964 (24.49)
Ref
Detail A
Typ 2 Plcs
C of
Pivot
Point
PANEL
B
R
I
G
H
T
D
I
M
0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)
0.675
(17.15)
R 0.080 Typ
(R 2.03)
V11-T5-4 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.2
Dimmers and Wipers
Rotar y Wipers
Rotary Wiper
Contents
Description Page
Rotary Wipers
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-6
Product Description
The rotary wiper has been
designed to be a highly
durable rotary wiper control
for the transportation
industry. The RW200 series
wiper has four wiper control
positions via a rotating knob:
Off, Intermittent, Continuous
Low Speed and Continuous
High Speed. The device has a
washer function that
operates the washer pump
and wiper while the knob is
depressed.
Features
●Load Dump Protection
●The switch will
withstand a 120V load
dump per SAE J1455
●Reverse Voltage Protection
●The device will not be
damaged when exposed
to 12 Vdc for 5 minutes
Options
●Variable bushing length
●Variable spindle length
●Choice of connectors
●Pad printing on knob
Standards and
Certifications
Meets SAE standards J1455,
J1944 and J1988.
Product Selection
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Rotary Wiper Code Numbers and Letters
Series Code Voltage Code
Packard
Connectors Code
Bushing Length in
Inches (mm) Code Catalog Number
RW RW 12 Vdc 200
12064752 12A 0.261 (6.63) A RW20012AA
0.424 (10.77) B RW20012AB
12977042 12B 0.261 (6.63) A RW20012BA
0.424 (10.77) B RW20012BB
6288538 12C 0.261 (6.63) A RW20012CA
0.424 (10.77) B RW20012CB
6294544 and 2977048 12D 0.261 (6.63) A RW20012DA
0.424 (10.77) B RW20012DB
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com V11-T5-5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.2
Dimmers and Wipers
Rotary Wipers
Technical Data and Specifications
Rotary Wipers
Connector Drawings
Circuit Continuity Wire Terminations
Description Specification
Operating voltage range 9 Vdc to 16 Vdc
Continuous load rating 17A from –40° to 73°F (–40° to 23°C)
Derated to 5A at 185°F (85°C)
Wiper electromechanical life 50,000 cycles
Electrical cycle life 250,000 cycles in the Intermittent position
300,000 cycles combined in the Low and High positions
Operating temperature –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)
Humidity rating Device will operate properly at 98% humidity between –40° and 100°F (–40° and 38°C)
Mechanical shock The switch will withstand a 3 ft drop on concrete
Vibration The device will operate properly while being exposed to 133 hours of 1G rms vibration
along all three axes, sweeping from 5 Hz to 1500 Hz at one octave per minute
12064752 12977042 6288538
6294544 2977048
Switch
Position Circuit Continuity
Off Open
Intermittent Yellow—Red and brown
Low speed Yellow
High speed White
Washer
Brown
Red—Positive
Black—Negative
Wire
Color Switch Connections
Yellow Motor low speed terminal
White Motor high speed terminal
Blue Motor park terminal
Black Ground
Brown Washer pump
Red +12 Vdc (positive)
V11-T5-6 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
November 2012
www.eaton.com
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.2
Dimmers and Wipers
Rotar y Wipers
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
RW200 Series
Off/Park
(Push In)
Washer
Slowest
Intermittent
Speed
Black
Lead
Yellow
Lead
WIPER
WASHER
4.505
(114.43)
Approx.
Ref
Continuous
Fast Speed
3.335
(84.71)
Approx.
Continuous
Low Speed
Brown Lead
Red Lead
Blue Lead
White Lead
0.099
(2.51)
1.805
(45.84)
0.424
(10.77)
1.358
(34.50)
2.230
(56.64)
2.188
(55.57)
2.188
(55.57)
0.248 (6.30)
Dia.
20º
20º
70º
20º
EATON
Fastest
Intermittent
Speed
0.609 +0.010 –0.015
(15.47 +0.25 –0.38)
1.176 +0.010 –0.025
(29.87 +0.25 –0.64)
Dia.
View B
0.370 (9.40)
Flats
3.029 +0.006 –0.010
(76.94 +0.15 –0.25)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T6-1
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Pushbuttons
AC Rated Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated Pushbuttons
XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons
6.1 AC Rated
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-2
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-3
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-4
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-5
6.2 Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-8
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-8
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-8
Series 206/208, 220 and 221/224, 231/234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9
Series 580/581/586 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-10
Series 770/775 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-11
Series 860 and 861/845, 810/815, 820/825 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13
Lamp Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-14
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-16
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-17
Terminal Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-18
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-18
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-18
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-19
6.3 XP Series Sealed Pushbutton
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-21
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-21
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-21
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-21
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-22
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-22
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-23
V11-T6-2 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.1
Pushbuttons
AC Rated
AC Rated
Contents
Description Page
AC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-3
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-4
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-5
Product Description
These general-purpose, AC
rated, pushbutton switches
offer a wide variety of
configurations, button styles
and termination types. The
7835 and 7836 light-duty
series pushbutton switches
are AC only. They feature
slow-make/slow-break butt-
type contacts with a light
operating pressure that is
particularly suited to
instrumentation applications.
Features
●Circuits
●1PST, 1PDT, 2PDT
●Momentary action
●Terminal Types
●Screw terminals, brass
(furnished unassembled)
●8448 Series
– #6-32 x 3/16 in
binding head screws
(Cat. No. 811-2)
●8410/8411 Series
– #5-40 x 3/16 in
(Cat. No. 811-7206)
●8406/8440 Series
– #5-40 x 5/32 in screws
(Cat. No. 11-26)
●Solder lug, brass silver-
plated
●Hardware supplied
●One hexagon locknut
(Cat. No. 15-192) and
one bright nickel-plated
knurled facenut
(Cat. No. 15-124F1)
●8411/8418 Series has
a bright nickel-plated
hexagon facenut
(Cat. No. 15-966-2)
●All hardware is furnished
unassembled
●Other mounting types
are flush, nest and
snap-in
Standards and
Certifications 1
●UL® Recognized
●CSA® Certified
●RoHS 2
Notes
1Except where noted.
2Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T6-3
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.1
Pushbuttons
AC Rated
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated
Light-Duty, Momentary Contact
Flush Mounted
Snap-in Mounted
Bushing Mounted
Notes
1 For circuit number detail, see table on Page V11-T6-18.
2 UL and CSA Listing not applicable.
3 To change operating pressure, refer to your local Eaton Sales Representative.
4 Operating pressure cannot be changed.
5 Combination spade and solder lug terminal.
6 Items are normally in distributor stock.
7 Standard length is 6 in (152.40 mm), stripped 0.625 in (15.88 mm).
Rating
Poles
and
Throw Contacts
Circuit
Number 1
Button
Construction Color
Button Extension
Dimensions “B”
in Inches (mm)
Typical Max.
Operating
Force
Mounting or Bushing
Length Dimensions
“A” in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Screw Terminals
1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc
3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1PST NC A Nylon Black 0.468 (11.89) 0.7 lbs 3Flush 8406K1
0.453 (11.50) 0.7 lbs 3Flush 8410K1
Rating
Poles
and
Throw Contacts
Circuit
Number 1
Button
Construction Color
Button Extension
Dimensions “B”
in Inches (mm)
Typical Max.
Operating
Force
Mounting or Bushing
Length Dimensions
“A” in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Spade Terminals (0.250 in)
3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc 1PST NC A Nylon White 0.375 (9.53) — Snap-in 8423K1 5
NO A Nylon White 0.375 (9.53) — Snap-in 8424K1 5
Rating
Poles
and
Throw Contacts
Circuit
Number 1
Button
Construction Color
Button Extension
Dimensions “B”
in Inches (mm)
Typical Max.
Operating
Force
Mounting or Bushing
Length Dimensions
“A” in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Solder Lugs
3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc 1PST NC ANylon Black 0.250 (6.35) 1.5 lbs 30.250 (6.35) 8411K5
3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc 1PST NC ANylon Black 0.406 (10.31) 1.5 lbs 30.468 (11.89) 8411K8
5 A, 12 Vdc,
3 A, 125 Vac 21PST NO AMetal — 0.296 (7.52) 2.5 lbs 0.468 (11.89) 8440K2 5
3 A, 125 Vac
1 A, 250 Vac
1/10 hp, 125 Vac
1PST NC
A Metal — 0.312 (7.92) — 0.562 (14.27) 7835K11A 6
ANylon
(snap-on)
Black — — 0.562 (14.27) 7835K11C
Red — — 0.562 (14.27) 7835K11D
3 A, 125 Vac
1 A, 250 Vac
1/10 hp, 125 Vac
1PST NO
A Metal — 0.312 (7.92) — 0.562 (14.27) 7836K11A 6
ANylon
(snap-on)
Black — — 0.562 (14.27) 7836K11C 6
Red — — 0.562 (14.27) 7836K11D 6
Screw Terminals
3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc 1PST NC A Nylon Black 0.406 (10.31) 1.5 lbs 30.468 (11.89) 8411K7
NO 0.375 (9.53) 1.5 lbs 40.468 (11.89) 8411K12
5 A, 12 Vdc,
3 A, 125 Vac 21PST NO AMetal — 0.296 (7.52) 2.5 lbs 0.468 (11.89) 8440K3 5
3 A, 125 Vac
1 A, 250 Vac
1/10 hp, 125 Vac
1PST NO
A
Metal — 0.312 (7.92) — 0.562 (14.27) 7836K13A
Wire Leads 7
3/4 A, 125 Vac
1 A, 250 Vac
1/10 hp, 125 Vac
1PST
NC A
Metal —
0.312 (7.92) — 0.562 (14.27) 7835K12A
NO 0.312 (7.92) — 0.562 (14.27) 7836K12A
Spade Terminals (0.250 in)
1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc
3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1PST NO A Nylon Red 0.250 (6.35) 1.5 lbs 40.250 (6.35) 8411K13 5
1PST NC A Nylon Black 0.406 (10.31) 1.5 lbs 30.468 (11.89) 8411K10
NO 0.375 (9.53) 1.5 lbs 40.468 (11.89) 8411K11 5
3 A, 125 Vac 1PST NC A Nylon Black 0.250 (6.35) 1.5 lbs 0.250 (6.35) 8418K1 5
NO 0.406 (10.31) 1.5 lbs 0.468 (11.89) 8418K12 5
Flush
Snap-in
Bushing
V11-T6-4 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.1
Pushbuttons
AC Rated
Non-Illuminated
Medium-Duty, Momentary Contact
One-Hole Mounted
Technical Data and Specifications
AC Rated
Notes
1For circuit number detail, see table on Page V11-T6-18.
2UL and CSA Listing not applicable.
Rating
Poles
and
Throw Contacts
Circuit
Number 1
Button
Construction Color
Button Extension
Dimensions “B”
in Inches (mm)
Typical Max.
Operating
Force
Mounting or Bushing
Length Dimensions
“A” in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Screw Terminals
15 A, 125 Vac
10 A, 250 Vac
1/3 hp, 125–250 Vac
1PST
NO A Metal —
0.531 (13.49) 0.9 lbs 0.687 (17.45) 8444K3
0.250 (6.35) 0.9 lbs 0.343 (8.71) 8444K4
15 A, 125 Vac, NO
10 A, 125 Vac, NC
10 A, 250 Vac, NO
5 A, 250 Vac, NC
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
1/4 hp, 125 Vac
1PDT
NO, NC
B Metal — 0.531 (13.49) 2.0 lbs 0.687 (17.45) 8434K2
B Bakelite Black 0.531 (13.49) 2.0 lbs 0.687 (17.45) 8435K2
15 A, 125 Vac
10 A, 250 Vac
2PST NO C Metal — 0.250 (6.35) — 0.343 (8.71) 8448K2 2
Spade Terminals (0.250 in)
15 A, 125 Vac
10 A, 250 Vac
1/3 hp, 125–250 Vac
1PST
NO A Metal — 0.531 (13.49) 0.9 lbs 0.687 (17.45) 8444K2
15 A, 125 Vac, NO
10 A, 125 Vac, NC
10 A, 250 Vac, NO
5 A, 250 Vac, NC
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
1/4 hp, 125 Vac
1PDT
NO, NC
B Metal — 0.531 (13.49) 2.0 lbs 0.687 (17.45) 8434K1
B Bakelite Black 0.531 (13.49) 2.0 lbs 0.687 (17.45) 8435K1
15 A, 125 Vac
10 A, 250 Vac
2PST NO C Metal — 0.250 (6.35) — 0.343 (8.71) 8448K1 2
Description Specification
Ratings See Product Selection tables on Page V11-T6-3 and the table above.
Contact material
3–6 A rated Movable, silver-plated copper
Stationary, silver-plated copper
10–15 A rated Movable, silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Stationary, copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Wire leads 18 gauge, 6 in (152 mm) long, skinned 0.75 in (19 mm)
Lengths beyond 6 in (152 mm) are additional charge
Mounting means—One-hole mount
Threaded bushing—0.468 in dia. 32 threads/inch (11.90 mm)
Keyway—0.068 W x 0.035 D in (1.73 W x 0.89 D mm); provides anti-rotation feature
Keyway on 7835/7836 Series is 0.080 W x 0.040 D in (2.03 W x 1.01 D mm)
Operating temperature range 0 °F to 150 °F (–17.8 °C to 65.6 °C)
One-Hole
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T6-5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.1
Pushbuttons
AC Rated
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
7835K12A
8406
8411K7 and 8411K8
8410
8411K5 and 8411K13
8411K11 and 8411K12
6.000
(152.40)
0.312
(7.92) 0.343
(8.71)
Keyway
0.080–0.085 W x 0.040–0.047 D
(2.03–2.16 W x 1.02–1.19 D)
0.312
(7.92) 0.812
(20.62)
0.562
(14.27)
0.562
(14.27)
0.484
(12.29) 0.625
(15.88)
0.469 (11.89)–32 TPI
0.250
(6.35)
1.060
(26.92)
Dia.
0.840
(21.34)
1.870
(47.50)
1.370
(34.80)
1.18 0
(29.97)
0.150 (3.81)
2 Holes
0.780
(19.81)
0.060
(1.52)
0.310
(7.87)
1.0 0 0
(25.40)
0.250
(6.35)
B
Spade Terminal Screw Type Terminal
0.060
(1.52)
0.260 (6.60)
Stroke
0.650 (16.51)
0.670 (17.02)
1.070 (27.18)
1.010 (25.65)
0.310 (7.87) Dia.
0.460 (11.68) Dia.
1.950 (49.53)
1.840 (46.74)
0.460 (11.68)
B
0.032
(0.76) 0.340
(8.64)
2–#5/40 Binding
Head Screw
Screw Type Terminals
0.090
(2.29)
0.040 (1.02)
0.180 (4.57)
0.650
(16.51)
Dia.
1.12 0
(28.57)
1.500
(38.10)
1.870
(47.50)
1.000
(25.40)
0.290 (7.37)
Dia. Button
0.150 (3.81)
Mounting Holes
B
1.250
(31.75)
0.060
(1.52)
0.250
(6.35)
0.230 (5.84)
Stroke
0.650 (16.51)
0.670 (17.02)
1.100 (27.94)
1.060 (26.92)
0.310
(7.87)
0.460 (11.68)
Dia.
1.610 (40.89)
1.500 (38.10)
0.090 (2.29)
Dia.
2 Holes
1.250
(31.75)
0.650 (16.51)
0.670 (17.02)
0.032
(0.76) 0.340
(8.64)
2.090
(53.09)
B
#5/40 x 0.188 (4.57)
Large Binding
Head Screw
Screw Type Terminals
0.070
(1.78)
V11-T6-6 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.1
Pushbuttons
AC Rated
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8411K10 and 8418K12
8418K1
8423 and 8424
8434K2 and 8435K2
0.310 (7.87)
Dia.
2.120
(53.85)
1.270
(32.26)
0.670
(17.02)
Dia.
0.030
(0.76)
0.370 (9.40)
Extension
0.460
(11.68)
0.340 (8.64)
Stroke 0.040 (1.02) Max.
Pre-Travel to Break Circuit
0.340
(8.64) 0.250
(6.35)
0.469 (11.91)
Dia. –32
Threads
per Inch
0.560
(14.22)
Hex
1.750
(44.45)
1.270
(32.26)
0.670 (17.02)
Dia.
0.030
(0.76)
0.220 (5.59) Stroke
and Extension
0.040 (1.02) Max.
Pre-Travel to Break Circuit
0.340
(8.64)
0.250
(6.35)
0.469 (11.89)
Dia. –32
Threads
per Inch
0.560
(14.22)
Hex
0.310 (7.87)
Dia.
B
0.240
(6.10)
0.340
(8.64)
0.740 (18.80)
Dia. max.
0.950
(24.13) 1.3 5 0
(34.29)
0.370
(9.40)
0.300
(7.62)
0.850 (21.59)
Dia.
0.850
(21.59)
Dia.
Note: Use 0.780 (19.81) dia. hole
on 0.060 (1.52) thick panel.
0.620
(15.75)
0.970
(24.64)
0.030
(0.76)
Ref
1.210
(30.73) 3–#6-32 x 3/16 LG
Binding Head Screw
0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
Keyway
0.100
(2.54)
0.300
(7.62)
0.700
(17.78)
0.520
(13.21)
Stroke
0.040
(1.02)
0.230
(5.95)
0.460 (11.68)
Dia.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T6-7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.1
Pushbuttons
AC Rated
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8440
8442 and 8444 (Screw Terminals)
8448K1
8448K2
0.620
(15.75)
0.460 (11.68)
Dia.
0.230 (5.84) Dia.
0.460
(11.68)
0.290
(7.37)
0.680
(17.27)
0.030 (0.76)
to 0.070 (1.78)
Pre-Travel
#15-32 Threads
0.030 (0.76)
Button
Depressed
0.620
(15.75)
B
A
0.940
(23.88)
1.210
(30.99) 0.260
(6.60)
0.090 (2.29)
Button Travel
to Make Contact
0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
Keyway
0.469 (11.91) Dia. –32
Threads per Inch
0.750
(19.05)
1.20 0
(30.48)
0.250
(6.35)
Stroke 0.469 (11.91) Dia.
–32 Threads per Inch
0.340
(8.64)
0.090 (2.29)
Button Travel to
Make Contact
1.310
(33.27)
0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
Keyway
0.460 (11.68)
Dia.
0.300 (7.62) Dia.
0.469 (11.91) Dia.
–32 Threads per Inch
0.460 (11.68)
Dia.
0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
Keyway
0.750
(19.05)
1.320
(33.53)
0.300 (7.62)
Dia.
0.090 (2.29)
Button Travel to
Make Contact
0.250 (6.35)
Stroke
1.060
(26.92)
0.760
(19.30)
0.340
(8.64)
V11-T6-8 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Contents
Description Page
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9
Lamp Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-14
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-16
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-17
Terminal Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-18
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-18
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-18
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-19
Product Description
Eaton offers a wide range of
pushbutton switches for
standard industry applications
such as appliances,
electronics, medical and test
instrumentation, office
equipment and many other
commercial applications.
A variety of options are
available such as illuminated
and non-illuminated versions,
colored lens caps, lamp
styles and mounting styles.
Each pushbutton series
offers a matching indicator
for a consistent look. See the
Product Overview tables to
quickly identify the required
product. Then, refer to the
Catalog Number Selection
and Product Selection tables
to determine the catalog
number.
Standards and
Certifications 1
●UL Recognized
●CSA Certified
●RoHS 2
Notes
1Except where noted.
2Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
Product Selection Guide
General Purpose Pushbuttons and Indicators—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated
Series 206/208 Page 220/221/224 Page 231/234 Page 580/581/586 Page
Pushbutton
Selection—Switch
V11-T6-9 V11-T6-9 V11-T6-9 V11-T6-10
Pushbutton
Selection—Indicator
V11-T6-9 V11-T6-9 V11-T6-9 V11-T6-10
Pushbutton Cap
Selection
V11-T6-13 V11-T6-13 V11-T6-13 V11-T6-13
Circuit Diagram Letter
(See Page V11-T6-18)
K, NK, NK, NJ, L, M
Series 770/775 Page 810/815 Page 820/825 Page 860/861/845 Page
Pushbutton
Selection—Switch
V11-T6-11 V11-T6-12 V11-T6-12 V11-T6-12
Pushbutton Cap
Selection
V11-T6-11 V11-T6-12 V11-T6-12 V11-T6-12
Pushbutton
Selection—Indicator
V11-T6-13 V11-T6-13 V11-T6-13 V11-T6-13
Circuit Diagram Letter
(See Page V11-T6-18)
Q K, N K, N J, L
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T6-9
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Series 206/208, 220 and 221/224, 231/234
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Series 206/220 1 and 221 1/231 1, Switch
How To Order—Series 208/224 1/234 1, Indicator
Notes
1Full cap style does not require a bottom lens code.
2Pole one is silver, pole two is gold.
3Refer to Page V11-T6-16 for barrier information.
4Not available with lighted display.
5Use two-digit item number, 30–37, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.
6Use two-digit item number, 01–19, from LED Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.
7Accepts two bulbs.
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2 0 6 K11912D0 3 0 5 S3 0
Base Prefix
206 = 206 Series
illuminated
220 = 220 Series
non-illuminated
221 = 221 Series
illuminated
231 = LED display
Product Type
K = Switch
Action
1 = Mom.
2 = Alt.
Terminations
1 = Solder
Full/Top
Lens Color
Bottom
Lens Color
All Series 206 Series Only
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 =Gray 4
21 = Black 4
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 =Gray 4
21 = Black 4
Pushbutton Height
206
A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
full
S = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
split
220 and 221/231
A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
full
Lamp
206 7/220 and 221
Incandescent 5
Example:
30 28-3158
231
LED lamps 6
Example:
02 Red, 5 Vdc
Example:
Number of
Poles
1 = 1PST
2 = 2PDT
Mounting 3
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
2 = Horiz. barriers
3 = Full barriers
Contact
Material
8 =Silver
9 = Gold
6 = 2PDT 2
Pushbutton Style
220 and 221
C = Clear
D = Deadfront
F = Filtered
M =Matte
231
M =Matte
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2 0 8 L 1 2 D 0 3 0 5 S3 0
Base Prefix
208 = 208 Series
indicators
224 = 224 Series
indicators
234 = 234 Series
indicators
Product Type
L = Indicator
Terminations
1 = Solder
Full/Top
Lens Color
Bottom
Lens Color
All Series 208 Series Only
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 =Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 =Gray 4
21 = Black 4
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 =Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 =Gray 4
21 = Black 4
Pushbutton Height
208 7
A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
full
S = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
split
224/234
A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
full
Lamp
208/224
Incandescent 5
Example:
30 28-3158
234
LED lamps 6
Example:
02 Red, 5 Vdc
Example:
Mounting 3
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
2 = Horiz. barriers
3 = Full barriers
Pushbutton Style
208/224
C = Clear
D = Deadfront
F = Filtered
M =Matte
234
M =Matte
V11-T6-10 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Series 580/581/586
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Series 580/581, Switch
How To Order—Series 586, Indicator
Notes
1Flush with bezel.
2Not available with lighted display.
3Use two-digit item number, 30–37, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
5 8 1 K13910T0 3 B3 0
Base Prefix
580 = 580 Series
non-illuminated
581 = 581 Series
illuminated
Product Type
K = Switch
Action
1 = Mom.
2 = Alt.
Terminations
1 = Solder
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 =Blue
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
20 =Gray
21 =Black 2
Pushbutton
Height
A = 0.270 in
(6.9 mm)
B = 0.330 in
(8.4 mm)
C = 0.440 in
(11.2 mm)
Lamp
Incandescent 3
Example:
30 28-3158
Example:
Number of Poles
1 = 1PST NO
2 = 1PST NC
3 = 2PST NO
4 = 2PST NC
5 = 2PST NO/NC
Mounting 1
0 = Chamfered bezel
1 = Flat bezel
Contact Material
5 = Silver plate
9 = Gold plate
Pushbutton Style
M =Matte
T = Translucent
Pushbutton Style
M = Matte
T = Translucent
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
5 8 6 L10T0 3 B3 0
Base Prefix
586=586 Series
indicators
Product Type
L = Indicator
Terminations
1 = Solder
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
20 =Gray
21 = Black 2
Pushbutton
Height
A = 0.270 in
(6.9 mm)
B = 0.330 in
(8.4 mm)
C = 0.440 in
(11.2 mm)
Lamp
Incandescent 3
Example:
30 28-3158
Example:
Mounting 1
0 = Chamfered bezel
1 = Flat bezel
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T6-11
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Series 770/775
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Series 770 1, Switch
How To Order—Series 775 1, Indicator
Notes
1Full or split cap style available.
2Flush with bezel.
3Not available with lighted display.
4Use two-digit item number, 51–59, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.
5Use two-digit item number, 80 or 81, from Neon Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
7 7 0 K11911M0 3 0 1 G8 0
Base Prefix
770 = 770 Series
illuminated
Product Type
K = Switch
Action
1 = Mom.
2 =Alt.
Terminations
1 = Solder
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 =Blue
Bottom
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 =Blue
Pushbutton Height
F = 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
full
G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm)
full
H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm)
full 2 3
S = 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
split
Lamp
Incandescent 4
Neon 5
Example:
80 28-3157
Example:
Number of
Poles
1 = 1PDT
2 =2PDT
Mounting 2
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
Contact
Material
8 = Silver
9 = Gold
Pushbutton Style
M = Matte
Lamp
Incandescent 4
Neon 5
Example:
80 28-3157
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
7 7 5 L11M0 3 0 1 G8 0
Terminations
1 = Solder
Pushbutton Height
F = 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
full
G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm)
full
H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm)
full 2 3
S = 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
split
Example:
Mounting 2
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
Pushbutton Style
M = Matte
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 =Blue
Bottom
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 =Blue
Base Prefix
775 = 775 Series
indicator
Product Type
L = Indicator
V11-T6-12 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Series 860 and 861/845, 810/815, 820/825
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Series 860 and 861/810/820, Switch 1
How To Order—Series 845/815/825, Indicator 1
Notes
1Full cap style does not require a bottom lens code.
2Pole one is silver, pole two is gold.
3Flush with bezel.
4Not available with lighted display.
5Use two-digit item number, 02–14, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.
6Use two-digit item number, 93–97, from LED Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.
7Not available with lighted display. Available only on “M.”
8Use two-digit item number, 70, from Neon Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
8 6 1 K13912D0 3 B0 2
Base Prefix
860= 860 Series
non-illuminated
861=861 Series
illuminated
810= 810 Series
illuminated
820= 820 Series
illuminated
Product Type
K = Switch
Terminations
1 = Solder
Full/Top Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
20 =Gray
21 = Black 4
Pushbutton Height
860 and 861
A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm)
C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm) 7
810/820
A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm)
B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)
Lamp
860 and 861
Incandescent 5
Example:
02 28-3154-2
810
Incandescent 5
LED 6
Example:
93 Red, 20 mA
820
Incandescent 5
Neon 8
LED 6
Example:
70 28-3156
Example:
Number of
Poles
860 and 861
1 = 1PDT
3 = 2PST
810
1 = 1PDT
2 = 2PDT
820
1 = 1PDT
2 = 2PDT NC
Mounting 3
860 and 861
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
2 = Horiz. barriers
810/820
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
Contact Material
8 = Silver
9 = Gold
6 = 2PDT/2PST 2
Pushbutton Style
C = Clear
D = Deadfront
F = Filtered
M =Matte
T = Translucent
Action
1 = Mom.
2 =Alt.
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
8 4 5 L12D0 3 B3 0
Base Prefix
845=861 Series
indicator
815= 810 Series
indicator
825= 820 Series
indicator
Product Type
L = Indicator
Terminations
1 = Solder
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
20 =Gray
21 = Black 4
Example:
Mounting 3
845
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
2 = Horiz. barriers
815/825
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
Pushbutton Style
C = Clear
D = Deadfront
F = Filtered
M =Matte
T = Translucent
Pushbutton Height
845
A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm)
C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm) 7
815/825
A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm)
B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)
Lamp
815
Incandescent 5
LED 6
Example: 30 28-3158
825
Incandescent 5
LED 6
Neon 8
Example: 93 Red, 20 mA
845
Incandescent 5
Example: 37 28-3158-8
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T6-13
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Caps
Series 206/220/231 and Series 580/770/810/820/849
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Series 206/220/231, Pushbutton Caps
How To Order—Series 580/770/810/820/849, Pushbutton Caps
Notes
1For a high degree of illumination, a full cap may be used with two lamp devices.
2Available only with colors red, green, yellow and blue.
3Available in matte only.
4Not available for lighted display.
5Measured from panel of top of pushbutton cap.
6Available in translucent and matte only.
7For two lamps, two colored inserts with divider.
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
2 0 6 PC0 3 0 4 S
Base Prefix
206 =2 lamp display
(Series 206/208) 1
220 =Non-illuminated
Series 220 and illuminated
Series 221, 224 and 234
231 =LED display on
Series 231 and 234
Product Type
P = Pushbutton
Display Legend/Style
C = Clear cap and color
insert, transmitted color
D = Deadfront, smoky gray
cap and color insert
F = Filtered color, white cap and
color insert 2
M = Matte, no insert, transmitted
color
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 =Blue
10 =Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 =Gray 4
21 =Black 4
Cap Height 5
A = 0.19 in (4.8 mm),
full
S = 0.19 in (4.8 mm),
split
Example:
Bottom
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 =Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 =Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 =Gray 4
21 = Black 4
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
5 8 0 PC0 3 0 4 B
Base Prefix
580 =Series 580, 581, 586 6
770 =Series 770, 775 3
810 =Series 810, 815
820 =Series 820, 825
849 =Series 845, 860, 861
Product Type
P = Pushbutton
Display Legend/Style
C = Clear cap and color insert,
transmitted color 7
D = Deadfront, smoky gray
cap and color insert
F = Filtered color, white cap
and color insert 7
M = Matte, no insert,
transmitted color
T = Transmitted color, smooth
surface, solid color
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 =Blue
10 =Amber
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
21 =Black 4
Cap Height 5
580
A = 0.27 in (6.9 mm)
B = 0.33 in (8.4 mm)
C = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)
770
F = Full, 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm)
H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm)
S = Split, 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
810/820
A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm)
B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)
849
A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm)
C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm)
Example:
Bottom
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 =White
02 =Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 =Blue
10 =Amber
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
21 =Black 4
V11-T6-14 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Lamp Selection
Incandescent Lamps
Bi-Pin Base for 800 Series
Midget Flange Base for 770 Series
Subminiature Wedge Base for 200 and 500 Series
Notes
1Use this two-digit number for installation in switches and indicators.
2Standard tolerance for MSCP is ±25%.
3Average life is for AC operation. DC life will be approximately 50% less. Operating incandescent lamps at 5–10% below rated voltage will generally increase lamp life 200–400%.
Item Number 1
To Order Lamp
Separately ASA Lamp Number Designed Volts Design Amps Brightness (MSCP) 2Brightness (Lumens) Lab Average Life (Hours) 3
02 28-3154-2 7361 5 0.06 0.05 0.63 100,000
03 28-3154-3 7945 6 0.04 0.03 0.38 10,000
07 28-3154-7 7381 6.3 0.20 0.40 5.03 50,000
08 28-3154-8 7371 12 0.04 0.12 1.51 10,000
09 28-3154-9 7330 14 0.08 0.50 6.29 750
10 28-3154-10 7382 14 0.08 0.30 3.77 50,000
11 28-3154-11 7370 18 0.04 0.15 1.89 10,000
12 28-3154-12 7327 28 0.04 0.34 4.27 7,000
13 28-3154-13 7387 28 0.04 0.30 3.77 25,000
14 28-3154-14 7876 28 0.06 0.34 4.27 25,000
Item Number 1
To Order Lamp
Separately ASA Lamp Number Designed Volts Design Amps Brightness (MSCP) 2Brightness (Lumens) Lab Average Life (Hours) 3
51 28-3155-2 345 6 0.04 0.03 0.38 10,000
54 28-3155-5 394 12 0.04 0.12 1.51 10,000
55 28-3155-6 330 14 0.08 0.50 6.29 750
56 28-3155-7 382 14 0.08 0.30 3.77 50,000
57 28-3155-8 370 18 0.04 0.15 1.89 10,000
58 28-3155-9 327 28 0.04 0.34 4.27 7,000
59 28-3155-10 387 28 0.04 0.30 3.77 25,000
Item Number 1
To Order Lamp
Separately ASA Lamp Number Designed Volts Design Amps Brightness (MSCP) 2Brightness (Lumens) Lab Average Life (Hours) 3
30 28-3158 56 5 0.115 0.15 1.89 20,000
31 28-3158-2 79 6 0.20 0.60 7.92 1,000
32 28-3158-3 84 6.3 0.04 0.03 0.38 20,000
33 28-3158-4 86 6.3 0.20 0.40 5.03 20,000
34 28-3158-5 18 14 0.04 0.13 1.63 5,000
35 28-3158-6 73 14 0.08 0.30 3.77 15,000
36 28-3158-7 85 28 0.04 0.30 3.77 7,000
37 28-3158-8 17 28 0.06 0.65 8.17 5,000
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T6-15
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Neon Lamps 1
T 1-3/4 Bi-Pin Base Neon Lamp for All 800 Series “Shorty” Switches and Indicators 2
T 1-3/4 Midget Flange Base Neon Lamps for All 700 Series Switches and Indicators 2
LED Lamps 4
LEDs are sold installed only.
LEDs for Series 231 through 235 Switches and Indicators
T 1-3/4 Wire LEDs for All 800 Series Switches and Indicators
Notes
1Neon lamps are not recommended for use with colored caps or inserts, especially those colored green or blue.
2Recommended external series resistor values shown for indicated average useful life are for lamp and resistor
combinations used across 110–125 Vac, 1/4 W, ±10% tolerance.
3Use this two-digit number for installation in switches and indicators.
4For use with clear or white cap only.
55 Vdc and 15 Vdc include internal current limiting resistor. Other voltages available—contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
6External current limiting required. User must include in circuit—to give current of 20 mA to LED.
Item
Number 3
To Order Lamp
Separately
CLC Lamp
Number
Nominal
Current MA
Average
Useful Life
(Hours)
External
Resistance
Required Bulb Size Lamp Length Lead Length
Circuit Volts Ignition Voltage
AC DC AC DC
70 28-3156 7A1H 105–125 150 1.5 25,000 47K (1/4 W) 95 135 T-2 0.60 0.25
Item
Number 3
To Order Lamp
Separately
CLC Lamp
Number
Nominal
Current MA
Average
Useful Life
(Hours)
External
Resistance
Required
Built-In
Resistance Bulb Size
Maximum
Overall Length
Circuit Volts Ignition Voltage
AC DC AC DC
80 28-3157 A1H 105–125 150 1.5 25,000 35K (1/4 W) None 95 135 T-2 0.67
81 28-3157-2 C-24 105–125 150 4.2 8,000 None 35K 95 135 T-2 0.67
Color Voltage 5
Without Diode
Protection
Item Number
With Diode
Protection
Item Number
Red Vdc 601 11
5 Vdc 02 12
15 Vdc 03 13
Yellow Vdc 604 14
5 Vdc 05 15
15 Vdc 06 16
Green Vdc 607 17
5 Vdc 08 18
15 Vdc 09 19
Item Number 3Color
Forward
Current
(MA) 5
Luminous Intensity (MCD) Forward
Voltage (V)
Typical
Diffused or
UndiffusedMinimum Typical
93 Red 20 80 160 1.7 Undiffused
95 Green 20 80 160 1.7 Undiffused
96 Yellow 20 80 160 1.7 Undiffused
97 Amber 20 80 160 1.7 Undiffused
V11-T6-16 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Mounting Barriers Ordering Guide
Catalog Number Example: 200B1
When switches are individually mounted, add 0.10 in (2.54 mm) per switch to the appropriate
bezel dimension. When switches are gang mounted, add 0.05 in (1.27 mm) to the appropriate
bezel dimension for each switch mounted plus an additional 0.05 in (1.27 mm) to compensate
for gang mounting.
Series 200 and 300 Mounting Barriers 12
Legending
All legend markings are pad printed in accordance with the limitations below. Standard markings
are of condensed gothic type, 1/8 in high characters, with white letters on blue, red and green
translucent pushbuttons and black letters on white, yellow, orange and all filtered pushbuttons.
Legending
Accessories
These snap-on pushbutton caps are made of molded plastic
for use with grooved style switches. They are ordered
separately for user assembly.
Snap-On Pushbutton Caps—Standard
Notes
1The full guard barrier is molded as an integral part of the switch body and is specified as a part of the complete switch catalog number.
2An end barrier is attached to each side of housing. The center barrier is used between devices when gang mounting in a slot array.
3For use with square devices and short side of rectangular devices.
4For use with long side of rectangular devices. Use a center—long between switches if gang mounting.
Product
Series
Product
Type Code
Barrier Type and
Description Code
200 Barrier BEnd—Short 31
Type 1 Type 2
Center—Short 32
End—Long 43
Type 3 Type 4
Center—Long 44
Pushbutton Size
Standard Pad Print
Limitations
1/2 in square pushbuttons 2 lines, 4 characters per line
5/8 in square pushbuttons—full legend 3 lines, 6 characters per line
5/8 in square pushbuttons—split legend 2 lines, 6 characters per line
3/4 in square pushbuttons 3 lines, 7 characters per line
3/4 in x 1 in rectangular pushbutton—full legend 3 lines, 9 characters per line
3/4 in x 1 in rectangular pushbutton—split legend 2 lines, 9 characters per line
Description
Button Diameter
in Inches (mm) Catalog Number
Black molded 0.625 (15.88) 53-3338
Red molded 0.625 (15.88) 53-3338-2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T6-17
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Technical Data and Specifications
General Purpose Pushbuttons and Indicators—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated
Notes
1Terminations are suitable for solder or female 110 connectors. Series 770: Solder only.
2See Engraving and Hot Stamping table on Page V11-T6-16 for more information.
3See Product Selection tables on Pages V11-T6-9–V11-T6-12 for more information.
4See Series 200 and 300 Mounting Barriers table on Page V11-T6-16 for more information.
Series 206/208 220/221/224 231/234 580/581/586
Ratings—
Silver Contacts
Gold Contacts
5 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac
0.1 A at 125 Vac/Vdc
5 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vdc
0.1 A at 125 Vac/Vdc
5 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vdc
0.1 A at 125 Vac/Vdc
Silver or Gold: 1 A at 125 Vac
Gold-plated contacts for low level
Action Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Switch Circuitry Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT
2-independent lamp circuits
Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT
Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT
Double break
1PST or 2PST
Termination Types 0.02 x 0.11 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm) 0.02 x 0.11 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm) 10.02 x 0.110 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm) 10.01 x 0.11 in (0.31 x 2.79 mm) 1
Pushbuttons 0.62 x 1.00 in (15.87 x 25.40 mm)
Rectangular
Full or horizontal split lens
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
0.63 in (15.87 mm)
Square
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
0.63 in (15.87 mm)
Square
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
0.50 in (12.70 mm)
Square
3 heights above panel E 3
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
Mounting Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in
(0.76 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in
(0.76 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in
(0.76 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap-in panel mounting
Choice of two bezel styles:
Chamfered or Flat
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in
(1.59 to 4.76 mm)
Lamps Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps
Incandescent
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament
Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps
Incandescent
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament
One rectangular LED flush with cap
Various voltages available
Diode protection available
Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps
Incandescent
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament
Pushbutton Travel 0.19 in (2.29 mm) 0.19 in (2.29 mm) 0.19 in (2.29 mm) 0.17 in (4.32)
Series 770/775 810/815 820/825 860/861/845
Ratings—
Silver Contacts
Gold Contacts
10.5 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac
0.25 A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc
3 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac
0.25 A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc
3 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac
0.25 A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc
6 A at 125 Vac or 3 A at 250 Vac
0.25 A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc
Action Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down
Switch Circuitry 1PDT or 2PDT (2 circuit)
2-independent lamp circuits
Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT
Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT
Double break
1PST or 2PST, NO
Termination Types 0.02 x 0.125 in (0.25 x 3.18 mm) 1
Epoxy sealed
0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1
Epoxy sealed
0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1
Epoxy sealed
0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1
Pushbuttons 0.73 x 0.97 in (18.54 x 24.64 mm)
Rectangular
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
0.75 x 1 in (19.05 x 25.40 mm)
Rectangular
2 heights above panel 3
5 styles
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
0.75 in (19.05 mm)
Square
2 heights above panel 3
5 styles
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
0.62 in (15.87 mm)
Square
Horizontal split legend
(indicator only)
3 heights above bezel 3
5 styles
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2
Mounting Panel mounting retained by molded
sleeve and nut
May be individually mounted
or gang mounted in horizontal
or vertical rows
Panel thickness from 0.03 to 0.25 in
(0.76 to 6.35 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap mount available
Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in
(1.59 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in
(1.59 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in
(1.59 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Lamps Accepts two T 1-3/4 midget flange
base lamps
Incandescent or neon
Front relampable
One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base
Incandescent, neon or LED
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament
One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base
Incandescent, neon or LED
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament
One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base
Incandescent, neon or LED
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament
Pushbutton Travel 0.22 in (5.59 mm) 0.22 in (5.59 mm) 0.22 in (5.59 mm) 0.22 in (5.59 mm)
V11-T6-18 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Terminal Identification
When specified on order,
switches will have the terminals
identified as shown in the
illustration at right. Terminal
markings will be ink-stamped on
the side of the switch case and
unused terminal positions will
not be identified.
All views are rear of switch with
keyway or at down as applicable.
Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and
5 and 8 are considered inboard
terminals for single-, two- and
four-pole switches respectively.
All others are considered
outboard.
Circuit Diagrams
Pushbutton Circuit Diagrams
Legends
Pushbutton Legend
Notes
1Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
2Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
3Dependent lamp.
4Independent lamp.
5Two circuit—indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two circuits being
controlled may be independent of each other.
6For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available.
7Available in 1PDT or 2PDT.
Circuit Letter Schematic Circuit Letter Schematic
A
1PST
I
2 circuit 5
B
1PDT
J
1PST
C
2PST
K
1PDT
D
2PDT
L
2PST
E
4PST 1
M
2PST
F
4PDT 2
N 6
2PDT
G 3
1PST
P
1PDT
H 4
1PDT
Q 7
2 circuit
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Single-
Pole
Two-
Pole
Four-
Pole
3
2
36
14
2
3
1
3
2
6
5
2
3
1
5
6
4
4
31
2
3
2
6
5
9
8
12
11
13
24
2
3
1
5
6
4
8
9
7
11
12
10
3
2
4
6
3
2
4
6
B
A
C
C
NC NO
G
H
NONC
Legend Rocker Switch Type
Contact terminal—will make contact with switch lever
Isolated terminal—does not make contact with lever
Center terminal and switch lever
Bulb
Momentary contact
Denotes mechanical contact portion
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T6-19
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
206 Series
220 Series
231 Series
580 Series
770 Series
810 Series
LEGEND
LEGEND
NC
NC
NO NO
C
A
B
2C
0.312
(7.92)
0.400
(11.18)
1.13 3
(28.78)
0.900
(22.86)
0.740
(18.80)
0.190
(4.83)
1.200
(30.48)
0.990
(25.15)
0.600
(15.24)
0.800
(20.32)
1.400
(35.56)
0.705 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
1.140 + 0.005
(28.96 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
LEGEND
NC
NC
NO NO
C
0.312
(7.92)
0.400
(10.16)
0.500
(12.70)
0.740
(18.80)
Typ.
0.190
(4.83)
0.800
(20.32)
Typ. 0.600
(15.24)
Typ.
1.40 0
(35.56)
C
0.750 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
0.750 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
NC
NC
NO NO
C
0.312
(7.92)
0.400
(10.16)
0.500
(12.70)
0.740
(18.80)
Typ.
0.190
(4.83)
0.800
(20.32)
Typ.
0.600
(15.24)
Typ.
1.400
(35.56)
C
0.100
(2.54)
C
L0.300
(7.62)
0.140
(3.56)
LED
C
L
0.750 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
0.750 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
0.400
(10.16)
0.310
(7.87)
0.890
(22.61)
A = 0.270 (6.86)
B = 0.330 (8.38)
C = 0.440 (11.18)
0.685
(17.40)
Typ.
0.500
(12.70)
Typ.
LEGEND
0.010 (0.254)
Rad. Max.
0.625 + 0.010
(15.88 + 0.254/
– 0.000)
0.625 ± 0.010
(15.88 ± 0.254)
0.400
(10.16)
0.960
(24.38)
0.970
(24.64)
1.19 0
(30.23)
0.730
(18.54)
F-S = 0.360 (9.14)
G = 0.270 (6.86)
H = 0.120 (3.05)
0.120
(3.05)
Panel thickness
0.030 (0.762) to
0.250 (6.35)
2.200
(55.88)
0.125
(3.18)
0.875 ± 0.005
(22.23 ± 0.127)
1.110 ± 0.005
(28.19 ± 0.127)
0.550
(13.97)
0.940
(23.88)
0.310
(7.87)
0.910
(23.11)
A = 0.330 (8.38)
B = 0.440 (11.18)
1.0 0 0
(25.40)
LEGEND
0.010 (0.254)
Rad. Max.
1.17 0
(29.72)
0.750
(19.05)
1.070
(27.18)
1.110 ± 0.005
(28.19 ± 0.127)
0.875 ± 0.005
(22.23 ± 0.127)
V11-T6-20 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.2
Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
820 Series 860 Series
A = 0.330 (8.38)
B = 0.440 (11.18)
LEGEND
0.750
(19.05)
Typ.
0.940
(23.88)
Typ.
0.025
(0.64)
0.280 (7.11)
0.840
(21.34)
0.660
(16.76)
1.110 (28.19)
0.160
(4.06) 0.160 (4.06)
0.310
(7.87)
0.910
(23.11) 0.090
(2.29)
0.010 (0.254)
Rad. Max.
0.875 + 0.005
(22.23 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
0.875 + 0.005
(22.23 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
LEGEND
0.755 ± 0.005
(19.18 ± 0.127)
0.755 ± 0.005
(19.18 ± 0.127)
0.010 (0.254)
Rad. Max.
0.280
(7.11)
0.515
(13.08)
0.250
(6.35)
1.000
(2.54)
0.310
(7.87)
0.620
(15.75)
Typ.
0.850
(21.59)
Typ.
A = 0.240 (6.10)
B = 0.350 (8.89)
C = 0.140 (3.56)
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T6-21
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.3
Pushbuttons
XP Series Sealed Pushbutton
XP Series Sealed Pushbutton
Contents
Description Page
XP Series Sealed Pushbutton
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-22
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-22
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-23
Product Description
Eaton’s Vehicle Control
business is pleased to offer
our newest line of sealed
pushbutton switches with
multiple color options for
ease of application
identification.
These pushbuttons are
available in a standard circuit:
OFF—ON (Momentary).
Included with each switch is
the necessary mounting
hardware as well as a rubber
panel seal gasket.
Application Description
●Lawn and garden
equipment
●Industrial and commercial
equipment
●Fire trucks and safety
vehicles
●Light recreational vehicles
Features
●Mounting hardware
included (packaged
separately)
●5/8 inch internal toothed
lock-washer
●5/8-24 UNEF-28
panel nut
●Rubber panel seal
gasket
Standards and
Certifications
●UL Recognition at 6 A,
125 Vac, and 3 A, 250 Vac
●RoHS Compliant 1
Note
1Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.
V11-T6-22 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.3
Pushbuttons
XP Series Sealed Pushbutton
XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons
Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons
Technical Data and Specifications
XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons
Description Specification
Sealed level IP64
Ratings 3 A: 250 Vac; 6 A: 125 Vac; 10 A: 12 Vdc, 28 Vdc
Mechanical life 1,000,000
Electrical life 25,000
Termination Solder lugs, screw (M2 X 4), spade (0.189 inch quick-connect)
Operating temperature –25 °C to 85 °C
Special Features
XX = None
Series
XP = XP Series
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
XP H N T 3 XX
Circuit
H = SPST OFF–(ON)
Example:
Frame Color
N = Black
Actuator Color
G =Green
N = Blue 1
T = Red
V = Black
Y = Yellow 1
Terminal
1 = Quick-connect spade
2 =Screw
3 = Solder lug
Mounting hardware included
(packaged separately)
●Panel nut, internal toothed lock-
washer, rubber panel seal gasket
1Contact your local sales
representative for price, MOQ
and lead-time for yellow and
blue version actuator colors.
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
August 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T6-23
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.3
Pushbuttons
XP Series Sealed Pushbutton
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm [Inches]
XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons
Ø26.5 ± 0.3
[1.043 ± 0.012]
11.0 ± 1.0
[0.433 ± 0.039]
Ø18.5 ± 0.3
[0.728 ± 0.012]
M2 x 4
Solder Lug Version
2.8 ± 0.5
[0.111 ± 0.020]
0.8 ± 0.1
[0.031 ± 0.004]
12.7 ± 0.5
[0.500 ± 0.020]
18.7 ± 0.5
[0.736 ± 0.020]
5.8 ± 1.0
[0.229 ± 0.039]
31.4
[1.236]
4.8 ± 0.10
[0.189 ± 0.004]
14.0 ± 0.3
[0.551 ± 0.012]
Ø2.25 ± 0.20
[Ø0.089 ± 0.008]
1.00 ± 0.20
[0.039 ± 0.007]
Rubber Panel Seal Gasket
M2 Screw Terminal Version Quick-Connect Version
9.5 ± 0.5
[0.374 ± 0.020]
9.5 ± 0.5
[0.374 ± 0.020]
Thickness 1.5–5.0 mm
Mounting Hole
Ø16.4 ± 0.1
[Ø0.647 ± 0.004]
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T7-1
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7.1
Definitions
Switch Terminology
Glossary of Terms
Approval Marks 1
Note
1See specific product for specifications for applicable approvals.
Term Definition
One Pole (1P)—Single Pole (SP) A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in a single conductor of an electrical circuit.
Two Pole (2P)—Double Pole (DP) A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in both conductors of the same circuit.
Two Circuit (2 CIR.) A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in a single conductor of two independent circuits.
Single Throw (ST) A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at only one of the extreme positions of its actuator.
Double Throw (DT) A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at both extreme positions of its actuator.
Normally Open (NO) A momentary type switch in which one or more circuits are open when the switch actuator is at its normal or rest position.
Normally Closed (NC) A momentary type switch in which one or more circuits are closed when the switch actuator is at its normal or rest position.
Actuator A lever, pushbutton, slide, trigger or other means to which an external force is applied to operate a switch mechanism.
Alternate Action (Double Action Push) Push to make, then push to break a circuit.
Break-Before-Make A non-shorting switch mechanism that opens or breaks a connection in a conductor before closing or making a connection in another
conductor.
Make-Before-Break A shorting switch mechanism that closes or makes a connection in a conductor before opening or breaking a previous connection in
another conductor.
Life Expectancy The useful life cycle performance of a switch mechanism to open or close, make or break, an electrical circuit, based on statistical
probability.
Operating Force The force that must be applied to the actuator to move it from the free position to the operating position.
Operate Position The position of the actuator at which the circuit transfers.
Release Force In a momentary type switch, the value to which the force on the actuator must be reduced to allow the contacts to return to the normal
or rest position.
Momentary Action Switches Momentary action switches turn a process ON and OFF when force is applied and then removed. The applied force can make the circuit change state
and the removed force returns circuit to its original state.
Maintained Action Switches A type of device in which the switch or button physically keeps the circuit in the actuated position.
Half-Throw Circuit A circuit where the actuator has only two positions (center and one extreme position) with a positive stop that prevents actuator movement to the
opposite extreme position.
Mark Country/Region Definition
U.S.A. UL® Recognized
Listing Number: Switches—E24354 or File E1148, WOYR2 1609; Indicator—E70176, E2702
Canada UL Recognized
Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Numbers: E2702, E180275, E43960 and E147754þ
U.S.A. and Canada UL Recognized
Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Number: E2702 (but not all sections)
Canada CSA®—Canadian Standards Associations (Certified)
Listing Number: LR10538 or 45995, 9002 Class 6241
U.S.A. UL Listed
Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Number:þE180275
Europe ENEC: European Norms Electrical Certification; Listing Number: E2702 (but not all sections)
— Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2001/65/EU
EN
EC
V11-T7-2 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7.2
Index
11-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-33
13-5496 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-7
13-8171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-7
13-8173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-6, 11-T3-7
1500_–1507_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-44
1500H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-45
15-1043_–15-1047_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31
15-1048-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31, 11-T4-33
15-1049_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-33
15-124F_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31
15-1525_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31
15-189-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31
15-192_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31
15-2523_–15-2528_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31
15-2534-14_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31
15-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31
15-966-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31
15-994-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31
1600_–1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-48
1600H_–1620H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-51
1609_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-49, 11-T2-53
1620HX_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-51
17-19263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77
17-19264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77
17-19544-2_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77
17-21159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77
17-21160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77
17-21543 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77
17-22145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-40
17-22145_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-40
17-22146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-40
17-22152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-40
17-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11
200B_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-16
206K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9
206P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13
208L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9
220K_–221K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9
220P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13
224L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9
231K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9
231P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13
234L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9
2500_–2507_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-44
2500H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-45
25-13936_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-40
2600_–2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-48
2600H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-51
28-3154_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-14
28-3155_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-14
28-3156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-15
28-3157_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-15
28-3158_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-14
28-3425_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-65
28-3426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-76
28-5148_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-65
28-5415_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-62
28-5555_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-72
28-5558 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-76
28-5637-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-76
28-5863_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-13
28-5901_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-9
28-5909_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-9
28-5940 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-76
29-761-5_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-32
2CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-15
2N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-14
30-2899-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-34
30-5632-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-34
32-2245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-38
32-341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-33
3CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-15
3N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-14
53-3318_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77
53-3338_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-16
53-73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11
580K_–581K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-10
580P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13
586L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-10
61-40_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11
6CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-15
6N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-14
7071K_–7073K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-9
7300K_–7317K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-6
7500K_–7510K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12, 11-T4-15
7530K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13
7546K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12
7555K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12
7560K_–7569K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13, 11-T4-15
7570K_–7571K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13, 11-T4-15
7576K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12
7580K_–7587K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12
7590K_–7597K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13
7630K_–7632K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—
March 2014
www.eaton.com V11-T7-3
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7.2
Index
7660K_–7668K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-4
7670K_–7674K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-4
7690K_–7695K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-14
7700K_–7705K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-14
770K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-11
770P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-13
775L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-11
7803K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-13
7804K_–7805K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-14
7810K_–7813K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-28
7818K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-2
7835K_–7836K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-3
7842K_–7846K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-6
7933K_–7935K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-14
7990K_–7992K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-28
8004K_–8005K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-66
8006K _–8007K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-63
8055K_–8057K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-56
8064K_–8065K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-73
810K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-12
810P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-13
8130K_–8138K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-55
8140K_–8148K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-55
8150K_–8155K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-55
815L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-12
8166K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-9
8179K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-42
820K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-12
820P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-13
825L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-12
8261K_–8262K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-3
8280K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-20
8283K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-6
8290K_–8295K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-20
8370K_–8373K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-6
8370K_–8375K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-20
8381K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-20
8391K_–8396K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-20
8406K_–8411K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-3
8418K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-3
8423K_–8424K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-3
8434K_–8435K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-4
8440K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-3
8444K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-4
8448K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-4
845L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-12
849P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13
860K_–861K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-12
8800K_ -8860K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4
8857K_–8859K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-5
8928K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-6, 11-T4-20
8980K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-4
B1600_–B1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-50
B2600_–B2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-50
DP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-2
DS_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-2
E30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-7
E32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-10
E321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11
E324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11
E33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-14
eSM_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T1-7, 11-T1-10, 11-T1-11, 11-T1-13
eVu_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-17
MS25068_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4
MS25098_–MS25100_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-3
MS25125_–MS25127_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-5
MS25201_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4
MS35058_–MS35059_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4
NGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-8–11-T2-31
NGR Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-14, 11-T2-15
NGR Rocker Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-11
NGR Switch Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-10
P1600_–P1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-48
P2600_–P2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-48
RW_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-4
SVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-32–11-T2-40
SW1RY_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-33
WP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-2
WS_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-2
XTD_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-25
